The higher state educational establishment of Ukraine
The higher state educational establishment of Ukraine
The higher state educational establishment of Ukraine
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №1<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histological terms”<br />
Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />
histological terms<br />
Introduction. Phonetics. <strong>The</strong> alphabet. <strong>The</strong><br />
classification <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants.<br />
Diphthongs. Digraphs. Letter combinations.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> foundation <strong>of</strong> the European civilization is the cultural and scientific heritage <strong>of</strong><br />
the ancient world. <strong>The</strong> knowledge <strong>of</strong> the basic stages <strong>of</strong> the Roman history and the<br />
history <strong>of</strong> Latin language promotes the broadening <strong>of</strong> tne general range <strong>of</strong> interests<br />
<strong>of</strong> students.<br />
<strong>The</strong> learning <strong>of</strong> the Latin alphabet, the rules <strong>of</strong> pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels,<br />
consonants, diphthongs, digraphs and letter combinations is directed to the forming<br />
<strong>of</strong> the basic pronunciation and graphic habits.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
To know:<br />
- the Latin alphabet;<br />
- the classification <strong>of</strong> sounds;<br />
- the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants;<br />
- the diphtongs and their pronunciation;<br />
- the digraphs and their pronunciation;<br />
- the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> the letter combinations derived from Greek;<br />
- the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> the letter combinations ngu, su, qu, ti;<br />
- the most widely used Greek prefixes and roots which are written with “y”.<br />
To know how:<br />
- to correctly write the Latin letters;<br />
- to explain the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels, consonants, letter combinations in<br />
the words <strong>of</strong> Latin and Greek origin;<br />
- to correctly write the most widely used Greek prefixes and roots with “y”.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />
integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
English language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
To know how to write the letters <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin alphabet, to differentiate letters<br />
2
and sounds, diphthongs and<br />
monophthongs.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the student<br />
should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Alphabet<br />
Diphthong<br />
<strong>The</strong> graphic signs – letters arranged in the certain<br />
order.<br />
A combination <strong>of</strong> two vowels which are pronounced<br />
Phoneme<br />
as one sound or one syllable.<br />
<strong>The</strong> minimum speech unit which is singled out <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Phonetics<br />
continuous speech stream.<br />
<strong>The</strong> sound structure <strong>of</strong> the language; the branch <strong>of</strong><br />
linguistics which studies the sound structure <strong>of</strong> the<br />
language.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What do you know from the history <strong>of</strong> Latin?<br />
2. In what ways did Latin develop after the disintegration <strong>of</strong> the Roman<br />
Empire?<br />
3. What groups <strong>of</strong> terms does medical terminology consist <strong>of</strong>?<br />
4. What do you know about the Latin alphabet?<br />
5. What are diphthongs?<br />
6. What are the rules <strong>of</strong> the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> consonants and vowels?<br />
7. What are the spelling and meaning <strong>of</strong> the Greek roots and prefixes with<br />
“y”?<br />
8. How are the letter combinations ngu, su, ti, qu pronounced?<br />
9. How are the letter combinations with “h” pronounced?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
3
1. Do exercises 1–5 (pp. 16-17), explain the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels and<br />
consonants, diphthongs.<br />
2. Read correctly the words, underline the Greek prefixes and roots, explain<br />
their meaning: hypogastricus, myologia, polyvaccinum, salicylicus, pyrosis,<br />
otomycosis, dystonia, hypertonicus, glycerinum, oxydatus.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> language <strong>of</strong> medicine is Latin. If doctors from different countries<br />
speaking different languages gather together they can easily understand each other<br />
because all <strong>of</strong> them know Latin. English medical terminology is completely based<br />
on Latin. What is more, 60% <strong>of</strong> English words are derived from Latin. Latin<br />
belongs to Indo-European languages.<br />
From the history <strong>of</strong> Latin<br />
Many years ago before Christ there was a tribe who lived in Latium, the<br />
region which lied in the centre <strong>of</strong> modern Italy. <strong>The</strong> tribe spoke Latin. <strong>The</strong><br />
inhabitants <strong>of</strong> Latium were warlike, they were always at war, took other peoples,<br />
joined others’ territories to their own ones. In the joined territories they thrusted<br />
Latin. Little by little there was created the great and powerful Roman Empire,<br />
which stretched from Great Britain in the north to the Northern Africa in the south<br />
and from Portugal in the west to Asia Minor in the east. <strong>The</strong> population <strong>of</strong> this huge<br />
territory spoke Latin. <strong>The</strong> empire was called Roman because <strong>of</strong> the name <strong>of</strong> its<br />
capital Rome (in Latin Roma) which was founded in the 8-th century B. C.<br />
<strong>The</strong> Roman Empire was existing for more than one thousand years, but<br />
approximately in the fifth century A. D. it disintegrated at first in the West and the<br />
East and later on in separate countries.<br />
After the disintegration <strong>of</strong> the Roman Empire Latin developed in three ways:<br />
1. On the base <strong>of</strong> spoken Latin (sermo vulgaris) there appeared and<br />
developed modern languages <strong>of</strong> Romance group, such as Portuguese, Spanish,<br />
French, Italian, Romanian, Moldavian and some others.<br />
4
2. Latin has become the language <strong>of</strong> science, culture, education and religion.<br />
Such sciences as biology, chemistry, mathematics, law and diplomacy use Latin for<br />
their terms. In Catholic churches the service is conducted in Latin nowadays.<br />
3. Latin together with latinized Greek roots and word-building elements has<br />
become the basis <strong>of</strong> international medical terminology which consists <strong>of</strong> three big<br />
groups <strong>of</strong> terms:<br />
a) anatomic terminology;<br />
b) clinical terminology;<br />
c) pharmaceutical terminology.<br />
<strong>The</strong> Latin alphabet<br />
<strong>The</strong> Latin alphabet consists <strong>of</strong> 25 letters. <strong>The</strong> sounds which the letters<br />
represent are divided into vowels and consonants. <strong>The</strong>re are six vowels: a, e, i, o, u,<br />
y. Other sounds are consonants.<br />
<strong>The</strong> Latin alphabet has become the basis <strong>of</strong> alphabets <strong>of</strong> many European<br />
languages. <strong>The</strong> English ABC is almost the same as the Latin one.<br />
Latin <strong>The</strong> name<br />
<strong>The</strong> pronunciation and examples<br />
letters <strong>of</strong> the letter<br />
A a<br />
B b<br />
C c<br />
D d<br />
E e<br />
F f<br />
G g<br />
H h<br />
I i<br />
a<br />
be<br />
tse<br />
de<br />
e<br />
ef<br />
ge<br />
ha<br />
i<br />
[a] atrium (auricle)<br />
[b] bilis (bile or gall)<br />
[ts] cerebrum (brain)<br />
[k] caput (head)<br />
[d] derma (skin)<br />
[e] pes (foot)<br />
[f] flos (flower)<br />
[g] gaster (stomach)<br />
[h] herba (grass)<br />
[i:] intestinum (intestine)<br />
J j jota [j] junctura (junction)<br />
K k ka [k] Kalium (potassium)<br />
5
L l<br />
M m<br />
N n<br />
O o<br />
P p<br />
Q q<br />
R r<br />
S s<br />
T t<br />
U u<br />
V v<br />
X x<br />
Y y<br />
Z z<br />
el<br />
em<br />
en<br />
o<br />
pe<br />
ku<br />
er<br />
es<br />
te<br />
u<br />
ve<br />
iks<br />
ipsilon<br />
or igrek<br />
zeta<br />
[l] labium (lip)<br />
[m] magnus (big)<br />
[n] nasus (nose)<br />
[o] oculus (eye)<br />
[p] pulvis (powder)<br />
is written in the combination with “u” and pronounced<br />
as [kv] aqua (water)<br />
[r] ramus (branch)<br />
[s] sinister (left)<br />
[t] tela (tissue)<br />
[u] usus (use)<br />
[v] valetudo (health)<br />
[ks] radix (root)<br />
[kz] exitus (exit)<br />
[i] zygoma (cheek-bone)<br />
[z] zona (zone)<br />
[ts] Zincum (zinc)<br />
Diphthongs<br />
Diphthongs are combinations <strong>of</strong> two vowels which are pronounced as a<br />
single sound or a single syllable. <strong>The</strong>re are four diphthongs in Latin:<br />
Ae and oe which are pronounced as a single sound [e], e. g.: haema (blood),<br />
oedema (oedema).<br />
But if a + e or o + e are not diphthongs, we put two dots above the letter e<br />
and pronounce each vowel separately: aёr (air), poёta (poet);<br />
au is pronounced as ou in house, e. g.: Aurum (gold);<br />
eu as Latin e + u, pronounced rapidly as a single syllable: neurologus<br />
(neurologist).<br />
6
<strong>The</strong> pronunciation <strong>of</strong> consonants and vowels<br />
Most <strong>of</strong> consonants and vowels are pronounced as the corresponding letters<br />
<strong>of</strong> the English alphabet. But some <strong>of</strong> them have different phonation depending on<br />
the position in a word:<br />
[ts] before the vowels e, i, y and the diphthongs ae, oe, eu:<br />
cerebrum (brain), caecum (blind gut)<br />
C c<br />
[k] 1) before the vowels a, o, u and the diphthong au: caput<br />
(head), causa (reason);<br />
2) before consonants: cranium (skull);<br />
3)in the end <strong>of</strong> words: lac (milk).<br />
I i<br />
[i] in most <strong>of</strong> words: intestinum (intestine)<br />
[j] in the beginning <strong>of</strong> a syllable before a vowel:<br />
iuvenilis (youthful);<br />
S s<br />
L l<br />
is always pronounced s<strong>of</strong>tly: labium (lip).<br />
[s] sanus (healthy)<br />
[z] 1) between vowels: nasus (nose)<br />
2) between a vowel and consonant m or n:<br />
organismus (organism), extensor (extensor);<br />
[ks] in most <strong>of</strong> words: radix (root);<br />
7
X x<br />
[kz] in the beginning <strong>of</strong> a word between vowels: exitus (exit);<br />
Z z<br />
[z] in the words derived from Greek:<br />
zona (zone), zygoma (cheek-bone);<br />
[ts] in the words not derived from Greek:<br />
Zincum (zinc), influenza (influenza).<br />
<strong>The</strong> letter “y”<br />
<strong>The</strong> letter “y” derived from the Greek alphabet is always pronounced [i] and<br />
used in the words and term-forming elements derived from Greek.<br />
It is necessary to pay attention to the spelling and meaning <strong>of</strong> the Greek roots<br />
and prefixes widely-used in the medical terminology:<br />
hyper – points to the increase, too much:<br />
hypertonia (the increased blood pressure);<br />
hyp(o) – points to the decrease, reduction:<br />
hypotonia (the decreased blood pressure);<br />
dys – points to the breach, disorder:<br />
dyskinesia (disorder <strong>of</strong> movements);<br />
syn-/sym- – points to the joining, connexion:<br />
symbiosis (co-existence);<br />
poly – means much, many:<br />
polyvitaminum (vitamin complex);<br />
hydr(o) – points to the presence <strong>of</strong> water:<br />
hydrops (dropsy);<br />
ox(y) – means sour, points to the presence <strong>of</strong> oxygen:<br />
oxygenium (oxygen);<br />
8
pyr<br />
my(o)<br />
myk<br />
glyk<br />
-ylcycl<br />
– points to fire, heat:<br />
pyrogenes (causing heat);<br />
– muscle: myologia (science about muscles);<br />
– fungus: mycosis (fungoid disease);<br />
– sweet: glykaemia (sugar in blood);<br />
– this suffixe means substance, matter:<br />
salicylicus (salicylic);<br />
– means circle:<br />
encyclopaedia (encyclopaedia – a circle <strong>of</strong> knowledge).<br />
<strong>The</strong> letter combinations ngu, su, ti, qu.<br />
ngu<br />
[ngu] before consonants: angulus (angle)<br />
[ngv] before vowels: sanguis (blood)<br />
su<br />
[su]<br />
[sv]<br />
before consonants: sulcus (furrow)<br />
before vowels: consuetudo (habit)<br />
ti<br />
[ti] before consonants: tinctura (tincture)<br />
[tsi] before vowels (if before ti there are no letters s, t, x):<br />
injectio (injection), solutio (solution);<br />
but:<br />
combustio (burn), mixtio (mixture)<br />
qu [kv] aqua (water), Quercus (oak-tree), quinque (five)<br />
9
<strong>The</strong> letter combinations with “h”<br />
<strong>The</strong> letter combinations ch, ph, rh, th, sch are written in the words derived<br />
from Greek. <strong>The</strong>y are pronounced in the following way:<br />
ch [kh] Chamomilla (camomile), chole (bile or gall)<br />
ph [f] philosophus (philosopher), pharmacon (medicine)<br />
rh [r] rhaphe (seam), rhizoma (rhizome)<br />
th [t] thorax (chest), thea (tea)<br />
sch [skh] schola (school), schema (diagram, chart)<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Read and explain the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels, consonants, diphthongs:<br />
1. Ana, dens, pes, flos, manus, apis, avis, aorta, fossa, Salvia, littera, vas,<br />
vena, rete, sapo, pus, frons, dies, bovinus, internus, lien, impar, juventus, iuvare,<br />
linimentum, iacere, Iodum, innominatus, iudicare, injectio, Opium, ligamentum,<br />
fibula, odor, ars, Ferrum, pons, parvus, terra, tuba, regio, tendo.<br />
2. Gaster, digitus, gutta, genu, glycerinum, glandula, gracilis, signatura,<br />
gemma, gelatinosus, vagus;<br />
Homo, herba, hepar, humus, hypnosis, Hippocrates, hirudo, humerus,<br />
Hydrogenium, habere, herpes;<br />
Mel, fel, sal, sol, folium, ala, pulmo, oculus, myologia, longus, latus, oleum,<br />
lupus, locus, cartilago, ligamentum;<br />
Skeleton (skeleton, sceletum, skeletum), kefir, Kalium, keratitis, kephale,<br />
Kaolinum.<br />
10
3. Caries, acidum, bacca, cor, cornu, crus, Cuprum, cutis, clavicula, cavitas,<br />
Calendula, Calcium, occiput, canalis, collega, cellula, costa, color, bucca, coelia;<br />
Accessorius, casus, cataplasma, divisio, basis, nasus, ossa, posterior, saluber,<br />
sapo, spissus, crassus, sensus, transversus, plasma, spasmus;<br />
Externus, maximus, index, nux, simplex, flexor, cortex, mixtus, examinatio,<br />
exitus letalis, exempli causa, laxans, extractum, pix, apex, radix;<br />
Benzoas, trapezius, Zincum, horizontalis, azygos, protozoa, zygoma, zoon,<br />
zoster, zygota, zyma, influenza.<br />
4. Aequalis, haema, aether, caecum, praecipitatus, praesens, peronaeus,<br />
Graecus, sphaera, diaeta, praescribere, vertebrae;<br />
Coeliacus, foetor, lagoena, foetus, poena, oedema, coelia;<br />
Auditivus, trauma, cauda, clausus, gaudere, fauces, nausea, nauta, auris;<br />
Neurologia, pharmaceuta, genus neutrum, leucocytus, Eucalyptus.<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Read and explain the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> letter combinations:<br />
1. Chole, bronchus, cholecystis, charta, stomachus, cochlear, Chelidonium,<br />
chloridum, chorda, ischuria, schema, concha;<br />
Encephalon, aphonia, nephritis, diaphragma, pharynx, phosphas, phalanx,<br />
pharmacon, xiphoideus;<br />
Ichthyolum, asthenia, asthma, athleta, thyreoideus, <strong>The</strong>rmopsis,<br />
ethmoidalis, labyrinthus, aethylicus, phthisis;<br />
Rhaphe, rhis, Rheum, rhomboideus, rhizoma, rhexis, rhachis, Rhamnus,<br />
rhythmicus.<br />
2. Distinguere, sublingualis, singularis, angulus, pinguis, lingua, unguentum,<br />
ungula;<br />
Squamosus, quantitas, qualitas, quantum satis, antiquus, liquidus,<br />
quanterni, utraque, frequens, obliquus, quotidie, liquor, aqua;<br />
11
Repetito, palpatio, tinctura, festinare, constituens, ostium, titillatio,<br />
inflammatio, combustio, mixtio;<br />
Consuetudo, suaviter, sua sponte, suus, suadere, sulcus, suum cuique.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Which <strong>of</strong> the given consonants have the double pronunciation:<br />
a) l; b) k; c) s; d) x; e) h; f) z; g) c.<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Determine how the italicized letters (letter combinations) are pronounced:<br />
1) aёr 6) Iodum<br />
2) aeger 7) exitus<br />
3) iugularis 8) Aloё<br />
4) lagoena 9) Xer<strong>of</strong>ormium<br />
5) oxydum 10) paediater<br />
<strong>The</strong> variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
a) ae; b) oe; c) e; d) i; e) j; f) ks; g) kz.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
12
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №1<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histological terms”<br />
Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />
histological terms<br />
Phonetics. Long and short syllables. <strong>The</strong> stress.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> successful mastering <strong>of</strong> any language including Latin is conditioned by the<br />
grade <strong>of</strong> mastering <strong>of</strong> phonetic and pronouncing rules, i. e. the rules <strong>of</strong> pronuciation<br />
<strong>of</strong> the sounds and their letter correspondences, the rules <strong>of</strong> the stress, and also the<br />
skills to use the acquired knowledge in practice: to read, to put the stress, to write.<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
To know the rules:<br />
<strong>of</strong> dividing words into syllables in Latin;<br />
<strong>of</strong> long syllables;<br />
<strong>of</strong> short syllables;<br />
<strong>of</strong> the stress in Latin;<br />
the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> stress in the words derived from Greek with the suffix -ia.<br />
To know how:<br />
to read;<br />
to divide words into syllables;<br />
to determine whether the penult is long or short;<br />
to put the stress in the words derived from Latin or Greek.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />
integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language, English language<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
Words in English and Russian are<br />
pronounced with extra emphasis on one<br />
syllable, which is called “stress”<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the student<br />
should master while training for the studies.<br />
3
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Stress<br />
Penult<br />
Antepenult<br />
Stress is an extra emphasis on one syllable in the<br />
words.<br />
Penult is the next to last syllable.<br />
Antepenult is the syllable before the penult.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. How is a word divided into syllables?<br />
2. What are the rules <strong>of</strong> stress in Latin?<br />
3. When is the penult long?<br />
4. When is the penult short?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Learn the rules <strong>of</strong> stress, long and shorts syllables (pp. 18-20).<br />
2. Do exercises 1, 2 (p. 20), explain the place <strong>of</strong> stress in the words.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> Stress<br />
In order to put stress correctly it is necessary to divide a word into syllables.<br />
In Latin as in English, a word has as many syllables as it has vowels or diphthongs.<br />
E. g.: me-di-ca-men-tum.<br />
In dividing a word into syllables:<br />
1. Two contiguous vowels or a vowel and a diphthong are separated: dies, dies;<br />
fasciae, fas-ci-ae.<br />
4
2. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the second vowel:<br />
amicus, a-mi-cus.<br />
3. When two or more consonants stand between two vowels, generally only<br />
the last consonant goes with the second vowel: Ferrum, Fer-rum; cervix, cer-vix;<br />
ligamentum, li-ga-men-tum. However, a stop (p, b, d, t, c, g) + a liquid (l, r) count<br />
as a single consonant and go with the following vowel: vertebra, ver-te-bra;<br />
centimetrum, cen-ti-me-trum. Also counted as single consonants are qu and ch, ph,<br />
rh, th, which should never be separaited in syllabification: reliquus, re-li-quus;<br />
trochanter, tro-chan-ter; encephalon, en-ce-pha-lon.<br />
Words in Latin, like those in English, are pronounced with extra emphasis on<br />
one syllable; the placement <strong>of</strong> this “stress accent” in Latin follows these strict and<br />
simple rules:<br />
1. In a word <strong>of</strong> two syllables the accent always falls on the first syllable: homo,<br />
ca-put, sae-pe.<br />
2. In a word <strong>of</strong> three or more syllables:<br />
a) the accent falls on the next to last syllable (sometimes called the “penult”),<br />
if that syllable is long (ser-vá-re, for-tú-na, me-di-ca-mén-tum);<br />
b) the accent falls on the syllable before that (the “antepenult”), if the penult<br />
is short (éx-tra-ho, phi-ló-so-phus, cá-li-dus, vér-te-bra).<br />
Vowels in long syllables are marked with a “macron” or “long mark” (e. g.:<br />
ā). Vowels in short syllables are marked with a “small arch” (e. g.: ă).<br />
<strong>The</strong> penult is long:<br />
a) if it contains a diphthong: diāēta (diet);<br />
b) if a vowel stands before two or more consonants: ligamēntum (chord);<br />
c) if a vowel stands before x or z: reflēxus (reflex), Oryza (rice);<br />
d) if it contains a “long suffix” such as āl, ār, āt, ūr, ūt, īn, ōs: oblongātus<br />
(oblong), cultūra (cultivation), contagiōsus (infectious).<br />
5
<strong>The</strong> penult is short:<br />
b) if a vowel stands before another vowel or “h”: ĕa fov (pit), e xtrăho (I<br />
extract);<br />
c) if a vowel stands before the letter combinations ch, ph, rh, th: stomăchus<br />
(stomach), philosŏphus (philosopher);<br />
d) if a vowel stands before the combination <strong>of</strong> a stop (b, p, d, t, c, g) with a<br />
liquid (r, l): centimĕtrum (centimetre), palpebra (eyelid);<br />
e) if it contains a “short suffix” such as ǔl, cǔl, ŏl, ǐl, bǐl, ǐd, ǐc: muscŭlus<br />
(muscle), calǐdus (hot), sanabǐlis (curable).<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Determine whether the penult is long or short:<br />
lambdoideus, myocardium, subrotundus, Viburnum, superficies, contraho,<br />
adultus, diversus, Belladonna, expiratio, Oryza, sinister, tussis, axis, cervix, sagitta,<br />
Chamomilla, vertebra, tabuletta, , idaeus, reliquus, exemplum.<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Determine the long and short suffixes:<br />
globulus, gelatinosus, analgeticus, auricularis, scapula, vaselinum, calidus,<br />
utilis, lumbalis, mobilis, locatus, pilula, coronalis, solidus, umbilicus, cardiacus,<br />
innominatus, lingula, maxillaris, cultura, validus, oleosus, foveola, dilutus, solutus,<br />
clavicula.<br />
6
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Determine the stressed syllables:<br />
vertebra; maxilla; glutaeus; limpidus; tunica; cavernosus; incisura; dilutus;<br />
ventriculus; stomachus; apertura, capitulum; pelvinus; cerebrum; acidum.<br />
a) penult; b) antepenult.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
7
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №1<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong><br />
the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />
anatomic and histological terms”<br />
Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />
histological terms<br />
<strong>The</strong> notion “scientific term”. <strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />
anatomic and histological terms. <strong>The</strong> grammatical<br />
categories <strong>of</strong> a noun, the description <strong>of</strong><br />
declensions, the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> nouns, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the nominative<br />
and genitive cases, their part in the construction<br />
<strong>of</strong> terms. <strong>The</strong> non-agreed attribute, the ways <strong>of</strong><br />
translation.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
A term is a word or a word-combination which is a name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional<br />
concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong> science, production or arts. <strong>The</strong> modern medical<br />
terminology consists <strong>of</strong> three basic groups <strong>of</strong> terms:<br />
1) anatomic and histologic; 2) clinical; 3) pharmaceutical.<br />
Anatomic and histologic terminologies are studied according to International<br />
Parisian nomenclature, which was approved at the 6-th International Congress <strong>of</strong> anatomists<br />
in Paris in 1955.<br />
<strong>The</strong> base <strong>of</strong> anatomic terminology is a nom. <strong>The</strong> studying <strong>of</strong> the grammatical<br />
categories <strong>of</strong> a noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> the writing <strong>of</strong> nouns in the vocabulary, the<br />
forming <strong>of</strong> the habits <strong>of</strong> determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, gender and declension allow the<br />
students to master the anatomic terminology.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> the writing <strong>of</strong> nouns<br />
in the vocabulary, <strong>of</strong> the determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, gender and declension.<br />
2. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> forming and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the construction<br />
“the non-agreed attribute”.<br />
3. To be able to determine the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong> nouns.<br />
4. To be able to write nouns in the vocabulary form.<br />
5. To be able to make up and translate anatomic terms with the non-agreed<br />
attribute from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />
integration).<br />
3.1 Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />
3
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the student<br />
should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
1. Term.<br />
A term is a word or a word-combination which is a<br />
name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong><br />
science, production or arts.<br />
2. Gender.<br />
Masculine – genus masculinum (m); feminine –<br />
genus femininum (f); neuter – genus neutrum (n).<br />
3. Number.<br />
When a noun names one thing, we say it in singular,<br />
when it names more than one thing, we say it in<br />
4. Case.<br />
plural.<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
5. Declension.<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
6. Stem.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What are the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun?<br />
4
2. How is the declension <strong>of</strong> a noun determined?<br />
3. How is the gender <strong>of</strong> a noun determined?<br />
4. What is the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> a noun?<br />
5. How is the stem <strong>of</strong> a noun found?<br />
6. What is the non-agreed attribute?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Translate the terms into English:<br />
1) manubrium sterni;<br />
2) cavitas cranii;<br />
3) tuberositas costae;<br />
4) apex pulmonis;<br />
5) corpus vertebrae;<br />
6) radix dentis;<br />
7) musculi abdominis;<br />
8) foramen mandibulae.<br />
2. Translate the terms into Latin :<br />
1) body <strong>of</strong> the rib;<br />
2) angle <strong>of</strong> the sternum;<br />
3) arch <strong>of</strong> the aorta;<br />
4) incisure <strong>of</strong> the scapula;<br />
5) base <strong>of</strong> the skull;<br />
6) body <strong>of</strong> the tongue;<br />
7) tubercle <strong>of</strong> the upper jaw;<br />
8) cavity <strong>of</strong> the mouth.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic’s contents.<br />
5
Graph № 1<br />
<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histologic terms<br />
one-word two-word many-word<br />
dens<br />
capitulum<br />
frontozysamaticus<br />
corpus vertebrae<br />
atrium dextrum<br />
fovea capitis<br />
fenoris<br />
nervus petrosus<br />
minor etc.<br />
Graph № 2<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical<br />
categories <strong>of</strong> a noun<br />
gender number case<br />
m f n Sing. Plur. Nominativus<br />
Genetivus<br />
Dativus<br />
Accusativus<br />
Ablativus<br />
Vocativus<br />
6
Graph № 3<br />
Declension I II III IV V<br />
Gender f m<br />
n<br />
Case Nom. sing. -a -us -<br />
endings<br />
um<br />
-er -<br />
on<br />
m f m<br />
f<br />
n n<br />
Different -us - -es<br />
u<br />
Gen. sing. -ae -i -is -us -ei<br />
Graph № 4<br />
<strong>The</strong> vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> nouns<br />
a noun in Nom.<br />
Gen.<br />
sing.<br />
Gender<br />
sing.<br />
ending<br />
costa,<br />
ae<br />
f<br />
nervus,<br />
i<br />
m<br />
cavum,<br />
i<br />
n<br />
apex,<br />
icis<br />
m<br />
arcus,<br />
us<br />
m<br />
genu,<br />
us<br />
n<br />
facies,<br />
ei<br />
f<br />
7
Graph № 5<br />
Finding <strong>of</strong> the stem <strong>of</strong> a noun<br />
by dropping the genitive<br />
singular ending<br />
Nom. Sing. Gen. sing. Stem<br />
costa<br />
nervus<br />
cavum<br />
apex<br />
cartilago<br />
os<br />
arcus<br />
genu<br />
facies<br />
cost –ae<br />
nerv –i<br />
cav –i<br />
apic –is<br />
cartilagin –is<br />
oss –is<br />
arc –us<br />
gen –us<br />
faci –ei<br />
cost –<br />
nerv –<br />
cav –<br />
apic –<br />
cartilagin –<br />
oss –<br />
arc –<br />
gen –<br />
faci –<br />
Graph № 6<br />
<strong>The</strong> non-agreed attribute<br />
SN + SG<br />
dentis<br />
fovea<br />
a pit <strong>of</strong> the tooth<br />
dental pit<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
№1<br />
Translate into Latin and determine the declension <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
crest, edge, process, suture, foot, angle, bone, palate, horn, lung.<br />
№2<br />
8
Find the stem <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
phalanx, n gis f; labium, i n; Sinus, us m; cavitas, atis f; musculus, i m; genu, ics n;<br />
cartilage, inis f; thorax, acis m; fibula, ae f; dens, dentis m; cor, cordis n.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
№1<br />
Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
1) collum, i . . .; 2) radix, icis . . .; 3) tractor, us . . .; 4) pes, pedis . . .; 5) systema,<br />
atis . . .; 6) skeleton, i . . .; 7) foveola, ae . . .; 8) ductus, us . . .; 9) oculus, i . . .; 10)<br />
squama, ae . . .; 11) facies, ei . . .; 12) basis, is . . ..<br />
a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum.<br />
№2<br />
Add the Gen. sing. endings to the following nouns:<br />
1) museulus a) ae<br />
2) pulmo b) i<br />
3) costa c) is<br />
4) genu d) us<br />
5) tuberculum e) ei<br />
6) species<br />
7) arcus<br />
8) ganglion<br />
9) foramen<br />
10) facies<br />
Literature<br />
Basic:<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin Language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L. Grishchenko<br />
9
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №1<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histological terms”<br />
Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />
histological terms<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an adjective,<br />
division into groups.<br />
<strong>The</strong> gender endings, the determination <strong>of</strong> stem.<br />
<strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> considerable part <strong>of</strong> medical terms are attribute constructions, i. e. the<br />
word-combinations consisting <strong>of</strong> a noun and one or several adjectives.<br />
Mastering <strong>of</strong> the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing<br />
adjectives in the vocabulary, finding the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the principles <strong>of</strong><br />
agreement with nouns, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> translation and use <strong>of</strong> some adjectives in<br />
medical terminology is directed to the forming <strong>of</strong> making up, translation and use<br />
habits <strong>of</strong> medical terms.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To be acquainted with the principle <strong>of</strong> division <strong>of</strong> Latin adjectives into<br />
groups.<br />
2. To master the gender endings <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives.<br />
3. To master the gender endings <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd group adjectives.<br />
4. To learn to write down adjectives in the vocabulary form.<br />
5. To know the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> using the adjectives major, ius; minor, us in<br />
medical terminology.<br />
6. To know how to agree adjectives with nouns.<br />
7. To know how to translate terminological word-combinations from Latin<br />
into English and on the contrary.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an<br />
adjective, the description <strong>of</strong> declensions,<br />
the determination <strong>of</strong> the adjective stem.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
3
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
1. Vocabulary form<br />
2. Stem<br />
3. <strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />
<strong>The</strong> vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> adjectives includes the full<br />
masculine form and the feminine and neuter endings.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part <strong>of</strong> an adjective left after removing the<br />
inflection <strong>of</strong> the feminine gender.<br />
<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />
and number.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What groups are Latin adjectives divided into?<br />
2. Characterize the first group <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />
3. Characterize the second group <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />
4. Characterize the adjectives with the suffixes –ior (m, f) and –ius (n).<br />
5. How is an adjective agreed with its noun?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. a) Write down the abbreviated form <strong>of</strong> the adjectives. b) Write the<br />
adjectives <strong>of</strong> the first and second groups separately:<br />
1). Longus, longa, longum. 2). Frontalis, frontalis, frontale. 3). Ruber, rubra,<br />
rubrum. 4). Simplex, simplĭcis. 5). Saluber, salubris, salubre. 6). Cavus, cava,<br />
cavum. 7). Lateralis, lateralis, laterale. 8). Silvester, silvestris, silvestre. 9).<br />
Biceps, bicipĭtis. 10). Asper, aspěra, aspěrum. 11). Brevis, brevis, breve.<br />
12). Sinister, sinistra, sinistrum. 13). Nasalis, nasalis, nasale. 14). Rectus,<br />
recta, rectum. 15). Parvus, parva, parvum.<br />
4
2. Translate the terms into English, write down and memorize the vocabulary<br />
form:<br />
I. 1). Columna vertebralis. 2). Processus spinōsus. 3). Canalis<br />
sacralis. 4). Cornu coccygeum. 5). Costa vera, costa spuria. 6).<br />
Os occipitale. 7). Foramen magnum. 8). Pars basilaris. 9). Genu<br />
dextrum. 10). Atrium sinistrum.<br />
II. 1). Processus alveolaris. 2). Foramen palatīnum. 3). Crista<br />
palatina. 4). Facies nasalis. 5). Alveolus dentalis. 6). Facies<br />
maxillaris. 7). Os zygomaticum. 8). Tuberosĭtas masseterĭca. 9).<br />
Palātum osseum. 10). Musculus massēter. 11). Dens cariōsus.<br />
12). Regio buccalis.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Latin adjectives are divided into two groups:<br />
1) the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the first and second declensions;<br />
2) the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the third declension.<br />
<strong>The</strong> adjectives <strong>of</strong> the first group have three gender endings:<br />
-us, -er (m)<br />
-a (f)<br />
-um (n)<br />
So, the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the first group have the same endings as the nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />
corresponding declensions:<br />
masculinum femininum neutrum <strong>The</strong> vocabulary form and<br />
translation<br />
pr<strong>of</strong>undus pr<strong>of</strong>unda pr<strong>of</strong>undum pr<strong>of</strong>undus, a, um – deep<br />
purus<br />
pura<br />
purum purus, a, um – clean<br />
dexter dextra dextrum dexter, tra, trum – right<br />
liber<br />
libĕra libĕrum liber, a, um – free<br />
5
<strong>The</strong> feminine adjectives (-a) are declined like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the first declension,<br />
the masculine (-us, -er) and neuter (-um) adjectives are declined like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />
second declension.<br />
<strong>The</strong> adjectives <strong>of</strong> the second group (the third declension) are divided into<br />
three subgroups:<br />
1) the adjectives with three gender endings:<br />
-er (m), -is (f), -e (n)<br />
saluber, salubris, salubre – curative, healing (the vocabulary form – saluber, bris,<br />
bre);<br />
2) the adjectives with two gender endings:<br />
-is (m, f), -e (n)<br />
dentalis, dentale – dental<br />
(the vocabulary form – dentalis, e);<br />
brevis, breve – short<br />
(the vocabulary form – brevis, e);<br />
3) the adjectives with one ending r, s or x which is common for all genders,<br />
e. g.:<br />
recens – fresh<br />
simplex – simple<br />
par – equal<br />
<strong>The</strong> vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> these adjectives is like that <strong>of</strong> nouns, i. e. Nom. And<br />
Gen. sing. are indicated:<br />
recens, ntis (recens, recentis)<br />
simplex, icis (simplex, simplicis)<br />
par, paris<br />
<strong>The</strong>re is a separate group <strong>of</strong> the third declension consisting <strong>of</strong> the adjectives<br />
with suffixes –ior (m, f) and –ius (n), in Gen. sing. – iōris. <strong>The</strong>se suffixes point to<br />
6
the comparative degree <strong>of</strong> an adjective, but in anatomic nomenclature they are used<br />
in the meaning <strong>of</strong> the positive degree:<br />
superior, superius (superior, ius) – upper;<br />
inferior, inferius (inferior, ius) – lower;<br />
anterior, anterius (anterior, ius) – front;<br />
posterior, posterius (posterior, ius) – back, rear.<br />
E. g.: membrum superius (inferius) – upper (lower) extremity; arcus anterior<br />
– front arc; facies articularis posterior – back joint surface.<br />
In anatomic terminology the adjectives major (m, f), maius (n) – big, large<br />
and minor (m, f), minus (n) – little, small are used to designate the objects forming<br />
a pair:<br />
circulus sanguinis major et minor – systemic or greater circulation and<br />
pulmonary or lesser circulation;<br />
pelvis major et minor – big and small pelvis.<br />
To designate the objects non forming a pair the positive degree <strong>of</strong> these<br />
adjectives is used: magnus, a, um – big and parvus, a, um – small.<br />
E. g.: foramen occipitale magnum – big occipital foramen, arteria parva – small<br />
artery.<br />
<strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />
<strong>The</strong> normal role <strong>of</strong> adjectives is to accompany nouns and to modify, or<br />
limit, them in size, color, texture, character and so on; and, like nouns, adjectives<br />
are declined. Naturally, therefore, an adjective agrees with its noun in gender,<br />
number and case. More <strong>of</strong>ten the adjective follows the noun. <strong>The</strong> adjective with<br />
respect to the noun is called the agreed attribute.<br />
E. g.:<br />
1) ligamentum, i n latus, a, um<br />
ligamentum latum – wide ligament<br />
2) dens, dentis m cariosus, a, um<br />
7
dens cariosus – carious tooth<br />
3) regio, onis f frontalis, e<br />
regio frontalis – frontal region<br />
4) musculus, i m pr<strong>of</strong>undus, a, um<br />
musculus pr<strong>of</strong>undus – deep muscle<br />
5) os, ossis n longus, a, um<br />
brevis, e<br />
os longum – long bone<br />
os breve – short bone<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Add the ending <strong>of</strong> feminine and neuter genders to the following adjectives:<br />
transversus, costalis, verus, celer, ethmoidalis, teres, ĭcus, opt dexter, acer,<br />
pr<strong>of</strong>undus, par, liber, dentatus, dorsalis, medianus, cutaneus.<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Translate the terms into Latin:<br />
1. Simple joint, compound joint. 2. Transverse ligament. 3. Transverse nerve.<br />
4. Hollow vein. 5. Left atrium. 6. Gallbladder. 7. Right kidney. 8. Cervical vertebra.<br />
9. Long bone. 10. Right part.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Determine the group <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />
8
1) sacralis, e; 2) recens, ntis; 3) acutus, a, um; 4) latus, a, um; 5) niger, gra,<br />
grum; 6) alveolaris, e; 7) saluber, bris, bre; 8) lateralis, e; 9) simplex, icis; 10) acer,<br />
acris, acre; 11) dentalis, e; 12) asper, era, erum.<br />
a) 1-st group; b) 2-nd group.<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Choose the correct variant <strong>of</strong> agreement:<br />
I.<br />
1) scapula, ae f<br />
2) ventriculus, i m a) sinister<br />
3) atrium, i n b) sinistra<br />
4) pes, pedis m c) sinistrum<br />
5) manus, us<br />
6) ren, renis m<br />
II.<br />
1) os, ossis n<br />
2) incisura, ae f a) lacrimalis<br />
3) canalis, is m b) lacrimale<br />
4) sacculus, i m<br />
Test № 3.<br />
Find the corresponding translation <strong>of</strong> the Latin terms:<br />
1. Os breve a) optic axis<br />
2. Palatum durum b) dry skin<br />
3. Membrum sinistrum c) lymphatic vessel<br />
4. Pulmo dexter d) short bone<br />
5. Ligamentum flavum e) white line<br />
6. Axis opticus f) hard palate<br />
7. Margo interosseus g) right lung<br />
9
8. Cutis sicca h) interosseal edge<br />
9. Linea alba i) left extremity<br />
10. Vas lymphaticum j) yellow ligament<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
10
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №1<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />
histological terms”<br />
Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological<br />
terms<br />
<strong>The</strong> morphological structure <strong>of</strong> two- and many-word<br />
anatomic term with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes. <strong>The</strong><br />
current test control<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Each anatomic designation serves to mark the corresponding anatomic<br />
formation. This designation should be exact, monosemantic and involving all<br />
necessary signs <strong>of</strong> the anatomic formation. <strong>The</strong> considerable part <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
terms are two- and many-word formations. Without understanding the structure <strong>of</strong><br />
a term it is impossible to learn to make up and translate anatomic terms.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know:<br />
- grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> nouns;<br />
- grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> adjectives;<br />
- the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the practical stem <strong>of</strong> nouns;<br />
- the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives;<br />
- the principles <strong>of</strong> forming the construction “non-agreed attribute”;<br />
- the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> translating the construction “non-agreed attribute” from<br />
Latin into English and from English into Latin;<br />
- the principles <strong>of</strong> forming the construction “agreed attribute”;<br />
- the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> translating the construction “agreed attribute”.<br />
2. To know how:<br />
- to determine the structure <strong>of</strong> two- and many-word anatomic term with<br />
different types <strong>of</strong> attributes;<br />
- to translate many-word anatomic terms from Latin into English;<br />
- to translate many-word anatomic terms from English into Latin.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
3.1 Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun<br />
3
and an adjective, the description <strong>of</strong><br />
declensions, the determination <strong>of</strong> the<br />
noun and the adjective stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
1. Term.<br />
2. Gender.<br />
3. Number.<br />
4. Case.<br />
5. Declension.<br />
6. Stem.<br />
7. <strong>The</strong> non-agreed attribute.<br />
8. <strong>The</strong> agreed attribute.<br />
Definition<br />
A term is a word or a word-combination which is a<br />
name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong><br />
science, production or arts.<br />
Masculine – genus masculinum (m); feminine –<br />
genus femininum (f); neuter – genus neutrum (n).<br />
When a noun names one thing, we say it in singular,<br />
when it names more than one thing, we say it in<br />
plural.<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
<strong>The</strong> noun in genitive case is called the non-agreed<br />
attribute.<br />
4
<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />
and number.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What is a term?<br />
2. What structural kinds <strong>of</strong> anatomic terms do you know? Characterize<br />
each <strong>of</strong> them.<br />
3. What parts do two-word terms consist <strong>of</strong>?<br />
4. What parts do three-word and many-word terms consist <strong>of</strong>?<br />
5. What is the word-order in many-word anatomic and histological terms?<br />
6. What is the word-order in many-word pharmaceutical terms?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Translate the terms into English, write down and memorize the vocabulary<br />
form:<br />
I. 1). Sulcus sinus sigmoidei. 2). Nervus petrōsus minor. 3). Facies<br />
II.<br />
costalis anterior. 4). Pelvis major. 5). Pelvis minor. 6). Fovea cap ĭtis<br />
femŏris. 7). Forāmen venae cavae. 8). Atrium dextrum. 9). Basis<br />
cordis. 10). Arteria pulmonālis sinistra. 11). Vesīca urinaria. 12).<br />
Vesīca fellea.<br />
1). Forāmen apĭcis dentis. 2). Nervus palatīnus major. 3). Corpus<br />
mandibulae. 4). Pars alveolaris. 5). Forāmen mandibulae. 6). Os<br />
hyoideum. 7). Arcus zygomaticus. 8). Sutura palatīna transversa. 9).<br />
Apex dentis. 10). Radix dentis. 11). Foramen caecum linguae. 12).<br />
Palatum durum. 13). Palatum molle. 14). Frenulum labii superiōris.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
A term is a word or a word-combination which is a name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional<br />
concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong> science, production or arts.<br />
By structure anatomic terms may be one-word, two-word or many-word.<br />
5
One-word terms may be:<br />
a) single-root (a noun or a substantivized noun): caput (head), dens (tooth),<br />
ren (kidney), stoma (mouth), caecum (blind gut);<br />
b) derivative terms, formed by suffixation or prefixation: capit-ul-um (small<br />
head), dent-al-is (dental);<br />
c) compound terms, formed by composition <strong>of</strong> two or more stems: front-ozygomaticus<br />
(frontal-malar), zygomatic-o-maxillaris (malar-maxillary).<br />
Two-word terms comsist <strong>of</strong> a noun and an attribute (agreed or non-agreed):<br />
tunica mucosa (mucous membrane), lobus inferior (lower lobe), corona<br />
dentis (a crown <strong>of</strong> tooth), apex pulmonis (a top <strong>of</strong> a lung).<br />
Three-word and many-word terms consist <strong>of</strong> a noun and attributes (agreed or<br />
non-agreed). In anatomic and histological term-systems mixed constructions are<br />
used. In them the non-agreed attribute usually follows the agreed one: corpus<br />
adiposum buccae (adipose body <strong>of</strong> the cheek), foramen caecum linguae (a blind<br />
foramen <strong>of</strong> the tongue), but frenulum labii inferioris (the fraenum <strong>of</strong> the lower lip).<br />
N. B. In pharmaceutical terminology the non-agreed attribute is usually<br />
followed by the agreed one: tinctura Valerianae aetherea (ethereal tincture <strong>of</strong><br />
valerian).<br />
If a noun has several agreed attributes, they are placed according to the<br />
importance <strong>of</strong> an object’s definition. <strong>The</strong> attribute which points to the form<br />
(rotundus, ovalis, quadratus etc.), to the size (magnus, major, minor etc.), to the<br />
colour (flavus, albus etc.) and to the location (dexter, sinister, superior, inferior,<br />
lateralis etc.) is usually put in the last place. <strong>The</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> such construction<br />
into English begins from the end <strong>of</strong> a many-word term. E. g.: arcus dentalis<br />
superior – the upper dental arch.<br />
In many-word terms there may be two nouns, each <strong>of</strong> them with its attributes<br />
(agreed or non-agreed):<br />
facies articularis tuberculi costae – a joint surface <strong>of</strong> the tubercle <strong>of</strong> the rib;<br />
6
tunica mucosa vesicae felleae – a mucous membrane <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder.<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task №1<br />
Translate the anatomical terms into English:<br />
membrum superius sinistrum; sulcus sinus sigmoidei; lamina arcus vertebrae;<br />
tuberculum obturatorium anterius; tunica mucosa vesicae felleae; plica venae<br />
cavae; apex partis petrosae; tuba auditiva; plicae tunicae mucosae vesicae felleae.<br />
Task №2<br />
Translate the anatomical terms into Latin:<br />
true ribs; mucous membrane <strong>of</strong> the tongue; transverse nerve <strong>of</strong> the neck; fossa <strong>of</strong><br />
the gallbladder; right coronary artery; deep incisure <strong>of</strong> the scapula; plica <strong>of</strong> the left<br />
hollow vein; incisure <strong>of</strong> the heart apex.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test №1<br />
Find the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms:<br />
1) meatus acusticus cartilagineus externus a) fingers <strong>of</strong> the left foot<br />
2) musculus transversus linguae b) foramen <strong>of</strong> the apex <strong>of</strong> the tooth<br />
3) arteria circumflexa scapulae c) deltoid tuberosity <strong>of</strong> the<br />
humerus<br />
4) digiti pedis sinistri d) basal part <strong>of</strong> the occipital bone<br />
5) tuberositas deltoidea humeri e) internal base <strong>of</strong> the skull<br />
6) margo partis petrosae f) small horn <strong>of</strong> the hyoid bone<br />
7) foramen apicis dentis g) transverse muscle <strong>of</strong> the tongue<br />
8) basis cranii interna h) edge <strong>of</strong> the petrosal part<br />
7
9) pars basilaris ossis occipitalis i) external cartilaginous acoustic<br />
passage<br />
10) cornu minus ossis hyoidei j) circumflex artery <strong>of</strong> the<br />
scapula<br />
Test №2<br />
Add the corresponding ending instead <strong>of</strong> the dots:<br />
1) apertura sin … sphenoidalis<br />
2) basis ossis sacr …<br />
3) lamina et foramin … cribrosa<br />
4) oss … membri superioris<br />
5) facies articularis tuberculi cost …<br />
6) facies posterior part … petrosae<br />
7) pediculus arc … vertebrae<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />
a) –us; b) –i; c) –is; d) –a; e) –ae.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic:<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin Language and the fundamentals<br />
<strong>of</strong> medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong><br />
<strong>establishment</strong>s with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha,<br />
2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L. Grishchenko<br />
8
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
chair<br />
and<br />
_____________<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong><br />
2
Module №1<br />
Content module №2<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />
anatomic and histological terms”<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives<br />
<strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declensions as the way <strong>of</strong><br />
building <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms.<br />
<strong>The</strong> first declension nouns.<br />
<strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> expressions.<br />
<strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents.<br />
<strong>The</strong> Greek nouns <strong>of</strong> the first declension.<br />
<strong>The</strong> most common prepositions with Acc. and<br />
Abl.<br />
Practical exercises.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> considerable number <strong>of</strong> the key anatomic, histologic, clinical and<br />
pharmaceutical terms are the first declension nouns.<br />
Mastering <strong>of</strong> the lexical minimum, case endings, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the Greek<br />
nouns helps to replenish the vocabulary, forms the habits <strong>of</strong> grammatical correct<br />
use <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
<strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents and the finite terms-elements are the<br />
terminological base <strong>of</strong> clinical terms. In order to memorize the clinical terms it is<br />
necessary to learn to analyze them by word-forming elements (rood, suffix, prefix,<br />
3
stem, ending), to be able to determine the origin <strong>of</strong> a word, to understand the<br />
meaning <strong>of</strong> the word-forming elements.<br />
<strong>The</strong> important aspect <strong>of</strong> the topic are prepositions, because the termspreposition<br />
constructions take a significant glace in the anatomic, clinical and<br />
pharmaceutical terminology.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know the typical sign <strong>of</strong> the first declension nouns, the paradigm, the<br />
peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the masculine nouns.<br />
2. To know the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the Greek nouns <strong>of</strong> the 1-st declension.<br />
3. To know the basic ways <strong>of</strong> forming medical terms.<br />
4. To know what cases are governed by the Latin prepositions, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong><br />
using the prepositions in and sub.<br />
5. To know the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the first declension nouns and the finite<br />
terms-elements <strong>of</strong> the first declension.<br />
6. To know how to agree the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group with the 1-st declension<br />
nouns.<br />
7. To know how to translate the terms, including those which contain prepositions,<br />
from Latin into English and on the contrary, to determine the vocabulary from <strong>of</strong><br />
nouns and adjectives.<br />
8. To understand the meaning <strong>of</strong> the Greek and Latin elements <strong>of</strong> which the terms are<br />
formed.<br />
9. To know how to make up the clinical terms <strong>of</strong> the separate terms-elements, to<br />
translate the terms from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />
integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
4
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the student<br />
should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
1. Case.<br />
2. Declension.<br />
3. Stem.<br />
Definition<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. Designate the rules <strong>of</strong> finding gender, declension and stem <strong>of</strong> nouns.<br />
2. Designate the rules <strong>of</strong> writing nouns in the vocabulary.<br />
3. Designate the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st declension nouns, give the examples <strong>of</strong><br />
nouns in the vocabulary form.<br />
4. Designate the morphological signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives, the rules <strong>of</strong><br />
writing them in the vocabulary.<br />
5. Designate the rules <strong>of</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> adjectives with nouns.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
5
1. Decline:<br />
a) costa vera (true rib)<br />
b) aqua Menthae (mint water)<br />
c) sutura palatine mediana (middle palatine suture)<br />
2. Translate the word-combinations Latin:<br />
a) spongious substante<br />
b) external plate<br />
c) good colleague<br />
d) experienced oculist<br />
3. Translate the word-combinations with prepositions in and sub into Latin:<br />
a) under the tongue (Acc. Abl.)<br />
b) into water, in water<br />
с) in external plate<br />
d) in capsules, in tablets, in ampules<br />
4. Determine the forming stems and Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the given Greek words:<br />
myelos, phyfon, phleps, uron, cystis, gyne, physis.<br />
5. Make analysis, translate the terms into English:<br />
adenectopia, blepharoplegia, cystographia, spondylomalacia, sialorrhoea,<br />
mastopathia, uraemia, glossalgia, cholecysfotomia, hydrotherapia.<br />
6. Make up the terms <strong>of</strong> the given terms-elements:<br />
I. 1) gloss (o) – (-algia, -ectomia, -pathia, -plegia, -scopia)<br />
2) myel (o) – (-cele, -graphia, -pathia, -odynia)<br />
3) phleb (o) – (-logia, -graphia, -rrhaphia, -rrhogia, -ectasia)<br />
II. 1) –tomia (phleb-, cholecyst-, tonsilt-, spondyl-, blephar-)<br />
2) –logia (bio-, phyt-, cyt-, aeti-, hist-)<br />
3) –algia (mast-, cyst-, aden-, blephar-, cholecyst-)<br />
6
7. Make up the terms with the given meaning:<br />
1) hydor, hydr – (water): treatment with water, watery wine, water in the blood<br />
2) cystis, cyst – (bladder): examination <strong>of</strong> the bladder, section <strong>of</strong> the bladder,<br />
paralysis <strong>of</strong> the bladder<br />
3) cholecystis, cholecyst – (gall-bladder): dilation <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder, extraction <strong>of</strong><br />
the gall-bladder, disease <strong>of</strong> te gall-bladder, section <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic’s contents<br />
Graph № 1<br />
Declinatio I<br />
formal signs Case endings examples<br />
Nom. sing.<br />
- a<br />
- (f)<br />
Singularis<br />
Nom. –a<br />
Gen. –ae<br />
Dat. –ae<br />
Acc. –am<br />
Abl. –a<br />
aqua, ae f<br />
costa, ae f<br />
vertebra, ae f<br />
tabuletta, ae f<br />
Pluralis<br />
Nom. –ae<br />
Gen. –arum<br />
Dat. –is<br />
Acc. –as<br />
masculine nouns<br />
by<br />
meaning (the<br />
names <strong>of</strong><br />
pr<strong>of</strong>essions and<br />
7
Abl. –is<br />
male persons)<br />
Graph № 2<br />
<strong>The</strong> Greek nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />
1-st declension<br />
college, ae m –<br />
colleagul<br />
oculista, ae m –<br />
oculist<br />
poeta, ae m – poet<br />
nanta, ae m -<br />
sailor<br />
formal signs Case endings Examples<br />
Femininum<br />
Nom. sing – e<br />
Gen. sing - es<br />
Singularis<br />
f m<br />
Nom. –a -es<br />
Gen. –es -ae<br />
Dat. –ae -ae<br />
Acc. –en -en<br />
(am)<br />
Abl. –e -a<br />
systole, es f<br />
chole, es f<br />
aseites, ae m<br />
diabetes, ae m<br />
masculinum<br />
Nom. sing – es<br />
Gen. sing - ae<br />
Pluralis<br />
Nom. –ae<br />
Gen. –arum<br />
Dat. –is<br />
8
Acc. –as<br />
Abl. –is<br />
Graph № 3<br />
<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives with the 1-st declension<br />
nouns.<br />
planta, ae f (pant)<br />
medicates, a, um (medicinal)<br />
clavicula, ae f (clavicle)<br />
dexter, tra, trum (right)<br />
college, ae m (colleague)<br />
bonus, a, um (good)<br />
oculista, ae m (oculist)<br />
peritus, a, um (experienced)<br />
Graph № 4<br />
<strong>The</strong> basic ways <strong>of</strong> forming<br />
terms<br />
Affixation<br />
Stem composition<br />
(prefixation, suffixation)<br />
(combination <strong>of</strong> two or more<br />
stems)<br />
prefix<br />
root<br />
prefix<br />
gastro-scopia<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
(gaster, gastris f, stomach<br />
root<br />
suffix<br />
root<br />
- scopia - examination)<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
ending<br />
ending<br />
suffix<br />
9
+<br />
ending<br />
ab-ductor<br />
fove-ola<br />
inter-<br />
vertebr-al-<br />
is<br />
aden (o)-<br />
-tomia<br />
-ectomia<br />
-scopia<br />
-pathia<br />
-algia<br />
cholecyst<br />
-<br />
cystgloss-<br />
-algia<br />
blephar-<br />
phlep-<br />
aden-<br />
Graph № 5<br />
Prepositions<br />
govern Accusativus prepositions govern Ablativus<br />
10
per venam (Acc.)<br />
collega (Abl.)<br />
govern Accusativus<br />
in and sub<br />
cum<br />
govern Ablativus<br />
the question where<br />
to?<br />
the question<br />
where?<br />
inaquam (into water)<br />
sub costam (under<br />
rib)<br />
in aqua (in water)<br />
sub costa (under<br />
rib)<br />
Graph № 6<br />
<strong>The</strong> Latin–Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the<br />
first declension nouns<br />
Latin word Greek Meaning<br />
11
aqua<br />
cellula<br />
femĭna<br />
forma<br />
glandǔla<br />
lacrĭma<br />
lingua<br />
mamma<br />
medulla<br />
natura<br />
palpebra<br />
planta<br />
tela<br />
urina<br />
vena<br />
vesica fellea<br />
vesica urinaria<br />
vita<br />
hydrcytgynaecmorphadendacryglossmam-,<br />
mastmyelphysiblepharphythisturphlebcholecystcystbi-<br />
water<br />
cell<br />
woman<br />
form<br />
gland<br />
tear<br />
tongue<br />
lactic gland<br />
spinal cord;<br />
marrow<br />
nature<br />
eyelid<br />
plant<br />
tissue<br />
urine<br />
vein<br />
gall-bladder<br />
bladder<br />
life<br />
gingiva<br />
mandibula<br />
maxilla<br />
pulpa<br />
salīva<br />
ulmyl-,<br />
genygnathparenchymatsial-,<br />
ptyal-<br />
gum<br />
mandible<br />
maxilla<br />
pulp<br />
saliva<br />
<strong>The</strong> word terminations <strong>of</strong> the first declension<br />
12
Terms-elements<br />
Meaning<br />
-aemia<br />
-algia<br />
-odynia<br />
-ectasia<br />
-ectomia<br />
-ectopia<br />
-ergia<br />
-graphia<br />
-logia<br />
-malacia<br />
-pathia<br />
-plegia<br />
-rrhagia<br />
-rrhaphia<br />
-rrhoea<br />
-scopia<br />
-therapia<br />
-tomia<br />
-uria<br />
-cele<br />
blood<br />
pain (without any organic cause)<br />
pain<br />
dilation, strain<br />
extraction<br />
displacement<br />
reactivity <strong>of</strong> an organism<br />
investigation with the help <strong>of</strong> X-ray photograph or<br />
registration <strong>of</strong> signals<br />
science, knowledge<br />
s<strong>of</strong>tening<br />
disease<br />
paralysis, stroke<br />
bleeding<br />
putting stitches<br />
leaking<br />
examination with the help <strong>of</strong> special instruments<br />
treatment<br />
cutting<br />
urine<br />
hernia; concentration <strong>of</strong> liquid<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1<br />
Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />
13
a) sinister, tra, trum - scapula, ae f (scalula)<br />
(left)<br />
clavicula, ae f (clavicle)<br />
ventriculus, i m (ventricle)<br />
oculus, i m (eye)<br />
ren, renis m (kidney)<br />
pes, pedis m (foot)<br />
manus, us f (hand)<br />
atrium, i n (atrium)<br />
b) sanus, a, um - organismus, i m (organism)<br />
(healthy)<br />
tela, ae f (tissue)<br />
cellula, ae f (cell)<br />
cor, cordis n (heart)<br />
homo. inis m (man)<br />
organon, i n (organ)<br />
Task № 2<br />
Translate the terms:<br />
a) transverse line, oblong medulla, compact substance, spongious substance, true<br />
rib, false rib;<br />
b) fracture <strong>of</strong> scapula, clavicle, vertebras; plica <strong>of</strong> mucous membrane; incisure <strong>of</strong><br />
fibula; crest <strong>of</strong> the neck <strong>of</strong> rib; sutures <strong>of</strong> calvaria.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1<br />
Determine the declension <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
1) lacrima, ae f; 2) trauma, atis n; 3) haema, atin n; 4) struma, ae f; 5) systema, atis<br />
n; 6) forma, ae f; 7) pluma, ae f; 8) derma, atis n; 9) rima, ae f; 10) stoma, atis n;<br />
11) adenoma, atis n; 12) mamma, ae f.<br />
a) I; b) III.<br />
Test № 2<br />
Find the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms:<br />
14
1) costae verae; 2) corpus vertebrae; 3) orbita oculi; 4) collum scapulae; 5) fovea<br />
dentis; 6) vertebra coccygea; 7) concha nasalis media; 8) ala major; 9) incisura<br />
vertebralis; 10) incisura costalis.<br />
a) middle nasal coneha; b) costal incisure; c) true ribs; d) fovea <strong>of</strong> the tooth; e)<br />
nech <strong>of</strong> the scapula; f) vertebral incisure; g) orbit <strong>of</strong> the eye; h) body <strong>of</strong> the<br />
vertebra; i) cocoygeal vertebra; j) large wing.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals<br />
<strong>of</strong> medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong><br />
<strong>establishment</strong>s with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha,<br />
2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L. Grishchenko.<br />
15
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №2<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong><br />
the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />
anatomic and histological terms”<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives<br />
<strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declensions as the way <strong>of</strong><br />
building <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms.<br />
<strong>The</strong> second declension nouns, masculine and<br />
neuter genders. <strong>The</strong> vocabulary: the stable<br />
combinations, suffixes. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin<br />
equivalents <strong>of</strong> the 2-ns declension nouns.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> second declension nouns take the important place in medical terminology. <strong>The</strong><br />
key anatomic and histologic terms, the widely used names <strong>of</strong> diseases etc. belong<br />
to the 2-nd declension.<br />
Substantivization is the important aspect <strong>of</strong> the topic, as the names <strong>of</strong> intestines<br />
and membranes are formed by this way. <strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension nouns<br />
belong to the productive ones, mastering <strong>of</strong> them helps to broaden the potential<br />
vocabulary.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know:<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
the formal signs <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension nouns;<br />
the most important exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender;<br />
the case endings <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension;<br />
the productive suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension.<br />
2. To know how:<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
to decline the masculine and neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension in singular<br />
and plural;<br />
to agree adjectives with the 2-nd declension nouns;<br />
to form the 2-nd declension nouns by the way <strong>of</strong> suffixation.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
3
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
1. Case.<br />
2. Declension.<br />
3. Stem.<br />
Definition<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What nouns belong to the 2-nd declension?<br />
2. Name the nouns which are the exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> masculine<br />
gender.<br />
3. What are the case endings <strong>of</strong> masculine and neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd<br />
declension?<br />
4. Name the suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension nouns and their meaning. Give<br />
examples.<br />
5. Name the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin 2-nd declension nouns and word<br />
terminations.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Decline the following nouns in singular and plural:<br />
oculus, i m – eye; cavum, i n – cavity; methodus, i f – method.<br />
4
2. Translate the terms into English, write down and learn the vocabulary<br />
form <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives:<br />
1) Manubrium sterni. 2) Oculus dexter et sinister. 3) Cavum cranii. 4)<br />
Septum nasi osseum. 5) Nervus cardiacus. 6) Palatum durum. 7) Crystallus<br />
alba. 8) Tuberculum pharyngeum. 9) Ligamentum latum. 10) Nervus<br />
petrosus pr<strong>of</strong>undus. 11) Musculus longus colli. 12) Porus acusticus externus.<br />
13) Periodus critica morbi chronici. 14) Sulcus nervi petrosi majoris.<br />
3. Form the terms with the known meaning:<br />
a) encephal- (brain):<br />
stone in the brain, bleeding from the brain, brain hernia, s<strong>of</strong>tening <strong>of</strong><br />
the brain, headache;<br />
b) neur- (nerve):<br />
cutting <strong>of</strong> the nerve, putting stitches on the nerve, extraction <strong>of</strong> the<br />
nerve, germ <strong>of</strong> the nerve cell;<br />
c) ophthalm- (eye):<br />
pain in the eye, disease <strong>of</strong> the eyes, paralysis <strong>of</strong> the eye muscles,<br />
leaking from the eye;<br />
d) enter- (intestine):<br />
science <strong>of</strong> the intestines, fixation <strong>of</strong> the intestine, transplantation <strong>of</strong><br />
intestines, spasm <strong>of</strong> the intestine, artificial opening in the intestine;<br />
e) my- (muscle):<br />
knowledge <strong>of</strong> muscles, muscle pain, muscle spasm, disease <strong>of</strong><br />
muscles, cutting <strong>of</strong> the muscle;<br />
f) gastr- (stomach):<br />
extraction <strong>of</strong> the stomach, stomach bleeding, extraction <strong>of</strong> the<br />
stomach and duodenum, stomach leaking.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> second declension follows the rule already given for the first declension:<br />
base + endings. However, the endings differ from those <strong>of</strong> the first declension,<br />
5
except in the dative and the ablative plural. <strong>The</strong> nouns <strong>of</strong> this declension are<br />
regularly either masculine or neuter. Most second declension masculine nouns<br />
have a nominative singular ending in -us, while a few end in -er. <strong>The</strong> neuters end<br />
in -um and those derived from Greek end in -on. E. g.:<br />
musculus, i m – muscle<br />
cancer, cri m – cancer<br />
cavum, i n – cavity<br />
organon, i n – organ<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are several nouns with the masculine endings, belonging to the<br />
feminine or neuter genders (as the exceptions):<br />
bolus, i f – clay<br />
crystallus, i f – crystal<br />
diameter, tri f – diameter<br />
methodus, i f – method<br />
periodus, i f – period<br />
virus, i n – virus; pathogenic organism<br />
<strong>The</strong> case endings <strong>of</strong> masculine and neuter nouns<br />
<strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension<br />
Nom.<br />
Gen.<br />
Dat.<br />
Acc.<br />
Abl.<br />
Singularis<br />
m<br />
n<br />
-us, -er -um, -on<br />
-i<br />
-o<br />
-um like in Nom.<br />
-o<br />
Pluralis<br />
m n<br />
-i -a<br />
-orum<br />
-is<br />
-os -a<br />
-is<br />
6
N. B. It should be helpful to note that some second declension endings are<br />
identical to those in the first (the Dat. and Abl. plur. in -is) and others are similar<br />
(e. g., -am/-um in the Acc. sing., -arum/-orum Gen. plur., and -as/-os Acc. plur.).<br />
<strong>The</strong> second declension neuter endings are the same as the masculine<br />
andings, except that the nominative and accusative are identical to one another<br />
(this is true <strong>of</strong> all neuters <strong>of</strong> all declensions): -um/-on in the singular, -a in the<br />
plural.<br />
<strong>The</strong> examples <strong>of</strong> declining<br />
Masculine gender<br />
Ventriculus, i m – stomach, ventricle<br />
Nom.<br />
Gen.<br />
Dat.<br />
Acc.<br />
Abl.<br />
Sing.<br />
ventriculus<br />
ventriculi<br />
ventriculo<br />
ventriculum<br />
ventriculo<br />
Plur.<br />
ventriculi<br />
ventriculorum<br />
ventriculis<br />
ventriculos<br />
ventriculis<br />
paediater, tri m – p(a)ediatrician; puer, i m – boy, child<br />
Sing.<br />
Plur.<br />
Nom.<br />
paediater<br />
puer<br />
paediatri<br />
pueri<br />
Gen.<br />
paediatri<br />
pueri<br />
paediatrorum<br />
puerorum<br />
Dat.<br />
paediatro<br />
puero<br />
paediatris<br />
pueris<br />
Acc.<br />
paediatrum<br />
puerum<br />
paediatros<br />
pueros<br />
Abl.<br />
paediatro<br />
puero<br />
paediatris<br />
pueris<br />
7
Neuter gender<br />
cavum, i n – cavity; organon, i n – organ<br />
Sing.<br />
Plur.<br />
Nom.<br />
cavum<br />
organon<br />
cava<br />
organa<br />
Gen.<br />
cavi<br />
organi<br />
cavorum<br />
organorum<br />
Dat.<br />
cavo<br />
organo<br />
cavis<br />
organis<br />
Acc.<br />
cavum<br />
organon<br />
cava<br />
organa<br />
Abl.<br />
cavo<br />
organo<br />
cavis<br />
organis<br />
World-formation<br />
<strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> the second declension nouns<br />
<strong>The</strong> following suffixes are used in medical terminology more <strong>of</strong>ten:<br />
1) -ment-um points to the action or its result; e. g.: ligamentum, i n –<br />
ligament (from ligare – to tie)<br />
2) -ism-us means poisoning, unhealthy <strong>state</strong>, deviation from standard, e. g.:<br />
botulismus, i m – botulism, hard food poisoning; rheumatismus, i m –<br />
rheumatism<br />
3) -ŭl-us, -ŭl-um, -cŭl-us, -ŏl-us have diminutive or affectionate meaning,<br />
e. g.:<br />
tuberculum, i n – tubercle;<br />
musculus, i m – muscle<br />
4) -īn-um, -ōl-um point to the name <strong>of</strong> medicine, e. g.:<br />
penicillinum, i n;<br />
validolum, i n.<br />
<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the masculine<br />
nouns <strong>of</strong> the second declension<br />
8
Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />
animus, i m<br />
calculus, i m<br />
cancer, cri m<br />
digitus, i m<br />
fungus, i m<br />
humerus, i m<br />
locus, i m<br />
morbus, i m<br />
musculus, i m<br />
nasus, i m<br />
nervus, i m<br />
oculus, i m<br />
uterus, i m<br />
ventriculus, i m<br />
psychlithcarcindactylmyc-,<br />
mykbrachitopnos-,<br />
pathmyrhinneurophthalmmetr-,<br />
hystergastr-<br />
soul<br />
stone<br />
cancer<br />
finger<br />
mushroom, fungus<br />
shoulder<br />
place<br />
disease<br />
muscle<br />
nose<br />
nerve<br />
eye<br />
uterus<br />
stomach<br />
<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the neuter<br />
nouns <strong>of</strong> the second declension<br />
Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />
caecum, i n<br />
cerebrum, i n<br />
crassum, i n<br />
intestinum, i n<br />
labium, i n<br />
ligamentum, i n<br />
medicamentum, i n<br />
typhlencephalcolentercheildesmpharmac-<br />
blind gut<br />
brain<br />
large intestine<br />
intestine<br />
lip<br />
ligament<br />
medicine<br />
9
ectum, i n<br />
venenum, i n<br />
proct-<br />
toxic-, tox-<br />
rectum<br />
poison<br />
<strong>The</strong> word terminations<br />
- malacia<br />
- metria<br />
- opsia<br />
- paedia<br />
- penia<br />
- pexia<br />
- phagia<br />
- philia<br />
- phobia<br />
- plastica<br />
- stomia<br />
- trophia<br />
- iater<br />
- blastus<br />
- lithus<br />
- logus<br />
- spasmus<br />
s<strong>of</strong>tening<br />
measurement<br />
(eye) sight<br />
correction <strong>of</strong> defects<br />
lack, shortage<br />
fastening, fixation<br />
swallowing, eating<br />
inclination, predisposition<br />
fear<br />
restoration, transplantation<br />
artificial opening<br />
nutrition<br />
doctor<br />
germ<br />
stone<br />
specialist<br />
spasm<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
<strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1<br />
10
Find the suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 2nd declension nouns and explain their meaning:<br />
Alveŏlus, rheumatismus, saccŭlus, Morphinum, somnambulismus,<br />
instrumentum, Menthōlum, ventriculus, capitulum, Ephedrinum.<br />
Task № 2<br />
Translate into Latin, write down and learn the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the nouns<br />
and adjectives:<br />
1) <strong>The</strong> right atrium, the left atrium. 2) <strong>The</strong> muscles and nerves <strong>of</strong> the eyes and<br />
nose. 3) <strong>The</strong> cavity <strong>of</strong> the nose. 4) <strong>The</strong> cervix <strong>of</strong> the mandible. 5) <strong>The</strong> symptoms <strong>of</strong><br />
a dangerous disease. 6) <strong>The</strong> good method. 7) <strong>The</strong> white clay. 8) <strong>The</strong> mortal virus.<br />
9) A good friend. 10) <strong>The</strong> cancer <strong>of</strong> the stomach, lip, oesophagus.<br />
Task № 3<br />
Translate the terms into Latin, explain their structure:<br />
1). Extraction <strong>of</strong> the muscle. 2). <strong>The</strong> innate absence <strong>of</strong> the lips. 3). Pain in<br />
fingers. 4) Specialist on tissues. 5) Local pain. 6). Treatment with<br />
medicines. 7). Putting stitches on the blind gut. 8). Mental disease. 9).<br />
Intestinal stone. 10). Extraction <strong>of</strong> the large intestine. 11). Fixation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
rectum. 12). Fear to fall ill. 13). Knowledge <strong>of</strong> ligaments. 14) Science <strong>of</strong><br />
stomach and intestinal diseases. 15). Extraction <strong>of</strong> the uterus. 16)<br />
Specialist on the eye diseases. 17). S<strong>of</strong>tening <strong>of</strong> the eyeball. 18). Nose<br />
bleeding. 19). Nerve pain. 20). Fixation <strong>of</strong> the ligament. 21). Science <strong>of</strong><br />
mushrooms.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1<br />
Find the mistakes in the agreement <strong>of</strong> the adjectives with the nouns:<br />
11
1) diameter transverses; 2) brachium dexter; 3) periodus criticus; 4) nervus<br />
carotica; 5) methodus bonus; 6) labium superior.<br />
Test № 2<br />
Find the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms:<br />
1) antebrachium sinistrum a) yellow ligaments<br />
2) sulcus costae b) branch <strong>of</strong> the middle lobe<br />
3) ligamenta flava c) angle <strong>of</strong> the ventricle<br />
4) suturae cranii d) osseous septum <strong>of</strong> the nose<br />
5) ramus lobi medii e) left forearm<br />
6) septum nasi osseum f) fingers <strong>of</strong> the extremities<br />
7) angulus ventriculi g) sulcus <strong>of</strong> the rib<br />
8) digiti membrorum h) sutures <strong>of</strong> the skull<br />
Test № 3<br />
Find the mistakes in the spelling <strong>of</strong> the terms, if there are any:<br />
1) ophtalmoscopia, 2) hystologia, 3) encephalomalacia, 4) toxemia, 5) dysphagia,<br />
6) pharmacoterapia, 7) neuralgia, 8) rinorhagia, 9) citopenia, 10) histeropexia.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals<br />
<strong>of</strong> medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong><br />
<strong>establishment</strong>s with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha,<br />
2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L. Grishchenko.<br />
12
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №2<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histological terms”<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives <strong>of</strong><br />
the 1-st and 2-nd declensions as the way <strong>of</strong><br />
building <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives.<br />
<strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> past participles. <strong>The</strong><br />
vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> suffixes. <strong>The</strong> stable<br />
combinations. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> considerable part <strong>of</strong> medical terms are attribute constructions, i. e. the<br />
word-combinations consisting <strong>of</strong> a noun and one or several adjectives.<br />
Mastering <strong>of</strong> the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing<br />
adjectives in the vocabulary, finding the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the principles <strong>of</strong><br />
agreement with nouns, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> translation and use <strong>of</strong> some adjectives in<br />
medical terminology is directed to the forming <strong>of</strong> making up, translation and use<br />
habits <strong>of</strong> medical terms.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To master the gender endings <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives.<br />
2. To learn to write down the 1-st group adjectives in the vocabulary form.<br />
3. To learn to write down the past participles in the vocabulary form.<br />
4. To know how to translate terminological word-combinations from Latin into<br />
English and on the contrary.<br />
5. To master the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the first group adjectives and word<br />
terminations.<br />
6. To know how to form the clinical terms on the base <strong>of</strong> the Greek-Latin<br />
equivalents <strong>of</strong> the first group adjectives and word terminations.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an<br />
adjective, the description <strong>of</strong> declensions,<br />
the determination <strong>of</strong> the adjective stem,<br />
the formation <strong>of</strong> the past participles.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
3
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />
2. Stem<br />
3. Past participle<br />
<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />
and number.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part <strong>of</strong> an adjective left after removing the<br />
inflection <strong>of</strong> the feminine gender.<br />
Formed by adding the endings –us, -a, -um to the<br />
supine stem.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. How many groups <strong>of</strong> adjectives are there in Latin?<br />
2. What adjectives belong to the 1-st group?<br />
3. How is the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives determined?<br />
4. How are the 1-st group adjectives declined?<br />
5. How are the past participles formed?<br />
6. Name the suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives and their meaning. Give<br />
examples.<br />
7. Name the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin 1-st group adjectives and word<br />
terminations.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Translate the terms into English, write down and learn the vocabulary<br />
form <strong>of</strong> the words:<br />
1) linea alba<br />
2) porus acusticus<br />
3) nervus opticus<br />
4
4) palatum osseum<br />
5) fossa incisiva<br />
6) sulci palatini<br />
7) anulus fibrosus<br />
8) musculi obliqui<br />
9) bursa subcutanea<br />
10) ligamentum flavum<br />
2. Translate the terms into Latin, write down and learn the vocabulary form<br />
<strong>of</strong> the words:<br />
1) Transverse (process, ligament, diameter, sulcus, line).<br />
2) <strong>The</strong> closed fracture, the open fracture, the complete fracture.<br />
3) <strong>The</strong> compound joint.<br />
4) <strong>The</strong> circumpflex artery.<br />
5) <strong>The</strong> nameless line.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Adjectives <strong>of</strong> the first group<br />
Depending on the gender <strong>of</strong> a noun it may belong to the first or the second<br />
declension.<br />
<strong>The</strong> masculine adjectives which end in -us, -er and the neuter ones which end<br />
in -um are declined like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the second declension. <strong>The</strong> feminine<br />
adjectives ending in -a are declined like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the first declension. While the<br />
base remains constant, the adjective has masculine, feminine, or neuter endings<br />
according to the gender <strong>of</strong> the noun with which it is used, and it likewise agrees<br />
with its noun in number and case. <strong>The</strong> full declension <strong>of</strong> magnus and dexter below<br />
provides a good review <strong>of</strong> the first two declensions.<br />
Nom.<br />
Sing.<br />
magnus, magna, magnum<br />
Plur.<br />
magni, magnae, magna<br />
5
Gen.<br />
Dat.<br />
Acc.<br />
Abl.<br />
magni, magnae, magni<br />
magno, magnae, magno<br />
magnum, magnam, magnum<br />
magno, magna, magno<br />
magnorum, magnarum, magnorum<br />
magnis, magnis, magnis<br />
magnos, magnas, magna<br />
magnis, magnis, magnis<br />
Nom.<br />
Gen.<br />
Dat.<br />
Acc.<br />
Abl.<br />
Sing.<br />
dexter, dextra, dextrum<br />
dextri, dextrae, dextri<br />
dextro, dextrae, dextro<br />
dextrum, dextram, dextrum<br />
dextro, dextra, dextro<br />
Plur.<br />
dextri, dextrae, dextra<br />
dextrorum, dextrarum, dextrorum<br />
dextris, dextris, dextris<br />
dextros, dextras, dextra<br />
dextris, dextris, dextris<br />
<strong>The</strong> vocabulary form: magnus, a, um; dexter, tra, trum.<br />
Past Participles<br />
Past participles have the same endings that the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group<br />
have: -us (m), -a (f), -um (n). E. g.:<br />
compositus, a, um – compound, complex<br />
laceratus, a, um – lacerated<br />
mixtus, a, um – mixed<br />
Past participles are declined like the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group: the<br />
masculine and neuter genders like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the second declension, the feminine<br />
gender like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the first declension. Like an adjective, a past participle<br />
agrees with its noun in gender, number and case.<br />
articulatio, onis f<br />
compositus, a, um<br />
6
joint<br />
compound<br />
processus, us m<br />
process<br />
transversus, a, um<br />
transverse<br />
Substantivization<br />
In Latin there is a group <strong>of</strong> substantivized adjectives, i. e. those playing the<br />
part <strong>of</strong> nouns.<br />
E. g.:<br />
1) rectus, a, um – straight (adjective) – rectum, i n – rectum (noun);<br />
2) caecus, a, um – blind (adj.) – caecum, i n – blind gut, caecum (noun);<br />
3) aegrotus, a, um – ill, sick (adj.) – aegrotus, i m – patient (noun).<br />
<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents<br />
<strong>of</strong> the first group adjectives<br />
Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />
albus, a, um<br />
angustus, a, um<br />
caecus, a, um<br />
crassus, a, um<br />
durus, a, um<br />
flavus, a, um<br />
griseus, a, um<br />
humidus, a, um<br />
magnus, a, um<br />
leuk-, leucstentyphlpachysclerxanthpolihygrmega-,<br />
megal-, macr-<br />
white<br />
narrow<br />
blind<br />
thick<br />
hard; solid<br />
yellow<br />
grey<br />
humid, damp<br />
large, big<br />
7
medius, a, um<br />
mortuus, a, um<br />
multus, a, um<br />
niger, gra, grum<br />
novus, a, um<br />
parvus, a, um<br />
ruber, bra, brum<br />
siccus, a, um<br />
tardus, a, um<br />
mesnecrpolymelanneoolig-,<br />
micrerythrxerbrady-<br />
middle<br />
dead<br />
numerous; much<br />
black<br />
new<br />
small<br />
red<br />
dry<br />
slow<br />
<strong>The</strong> word terminations<br />
- dermia<br />
- aesthesia<br />
- megalia<br />
- sthenia<br />
- kinesia<br />
skin<br />
feeling, sense<br />
increase<br />
strength, force<br />
movement, motion<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1<br />
Translate the terms into Latin, write and memorize the vocabulary form:<br />
spongy substance<br />
optic nerves<br />
acoustic passage<br />
infectious disease<br />
palatine sulcus<br />
8
fibrous rings<br />
mucous membrane<br />
lymphatic nodes<br />
Task № 2<br />
Agree the 1-st group adjectives with the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns,<br />
translate the terms:<br />
1) dexter, tra, trum (clavicle, eye, scapula);<br />
2) caroticus, a, um (tubercle, nerve, ligament);<br />
3) sinister, tra, trum (eye, scapula, clavicle);<br />
4) transversus, a, um (diameter, hole, sulcus);<br />
5) internus, a, um (disease, nerve, artery).<br />
Task №3<br />
Form the terms with the known meanings:<br />
a) leuk- (white):<br />
white blood cell, lack <strong>of</strong> leucocytes, treatment with leucocytes, white<br />
blood, bleeding in the patients with leucosis;<br />
b) mega-, megal- (large):<br />
large eyes, large tongue, mania <strong>of</strong> greatness, increase <strong>of</strong> the large part <strong>of</strong><br />
the brain;<br />
c) erythr- (red):<br />
red blood cell, red colouring <strong>of</strong> the urine, vision <strong>of</strong> objects in red<br />
colouring, germ <strong>of</strong> the red blood cell, swallowing <strong>of</strong> erythrocytes.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1<br />
Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />
9
1) sinistrum; 2) lata; 3) zygomaticus; 4) superior; 5) niger; 6) coccygea; 7)<br />
criticum; 8) dexter; 9) maius; 10) spinosum; 11) pharyngea; 12) asper.<br />
a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum.<br />
Test № 2<br />
Choose the second part <strong>of</strong> the term according to the meaning:<br />
1) periodus … a) latus, a, um<br />
2) tuberculum … b) dexter, tra, trum<br />
3) glandula … c) pr<strong>of</strong>undus, a, um<br />
4) ligamentum … d) criticus, a, um<br />
5) costa … e) mucosus, a, um<br />
6) oculus … f) longus, a, um<br />
7) nervus … g) verus, a, um<br />
8) vena … h) pharyngeus, a, um<br />
Test № 3<br />
Find the corresponding translation <strong>of</strong> the Latin clinical terms:<br />
1). Erythrodermia a) Dry skin<br />
2). Xerodermia b) Dryness in the nose<br />
3). Xerocheilia c) Vision <strong>of</strong> objects in yellow<br />
colouring<br />
4). Erythropenia d) Imaginary decrease <strong>of</strong> the<br />
visible objects<br />
5). Melanodermia e) Thick tongue<br />
6). Bradykinesia f) Lack <strong>of</strong> erythrocytes<br />
7). Proctorrhagia g) Increase <strong>of</strong> the urine quantity<br />
8). Xanthodermia h) Red colouring <strong>of</strong> the skin<br />
9). Pachyglossia i) Dryness <strong>of</strong> the eye<br />
10
10). Xerorhinia j) Slow movement<br />
11). Xanthopsia k) Dry lips<br />
12). Megalopsia l) Black skin<br />
13). Polyuria m) Yellow skin<br />
14). Xerophthalmia n) Bleeding from the rectum<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
11
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 1<br />
Content modules №№ 1-2<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histological terms”<br />
1. Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />
histological terms<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives<br />
<strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declensions as the way <strong>of</strong><br />
building <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies <strong>The</strong> practical skills to the content modules 1-2<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> practical habits on the discipline “Latin language and medical<br />
terminology” includes the free reading <strong>of</strong> the Latin text, the use <strong>of</strong> the alphabet<br />
while working with the dictionary, the correct writing <strong>of</strong> the sounds <strong>of</strong> the Latin<br />
alphabet; the practical use <strong>of</strong> the Greek letter combinations in the words derived<br />
from Greek; free mastering <strong>of</strong> the lexical material and the skill to classify the words<br />
by cases with the purpose <strong>of</strong> correct writing <strong>of</strong> endings, free constructing <strong>of</strong><br />
anatomic and histological terms on the base <strong>of</strong> the acquired grammatical<br />
knowledge. That's why it is so important to work out the practical skills to the<br />
content modules 1-2.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know the Latin alphabet, the classification <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants,<br />
diphthongs, letter combinations, long and short syllables, the rules <strong>of</strong> stress.<br />
2. To know the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing nouns in<br />
the vocabulary, the determination <strong>of</strong> the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong><br />
nouns.<br />
3. To know the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the adjectives, division into groups,<br />
gender endings, the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem.<br />
4. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> constructing and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
constructions “the agreed attribute”, morphological and syntactical structure<br />
<strong>of</strong> two- and many-word terms with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes.<br />
5. To know the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns, the<br />
paradigm, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />
6. To know the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns,<br />
the 1-st group adjectives, the word terminations.<br />
7. To know how to determine the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong> nouns and<br />
adjectives, to write them in the vocabulary form.<br />
8. To know how to agree adjectives with nouns, to form two- and many-word<br />
anatomic terms.<br />
3
9. To know how to translate the terms from Latin into English and on the<br />
contrary.<br />
10. To know how to form the clinical terms <strong>of</strong> separate terms-elements, to<br />
translate them from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
English language<br />
Russian language, English language<br />
Russian language<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
To know how to write the letters <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin alphabet, to differentiate letters<br />
and sounds, diphthongs and<br />
monophthongs.<br />
Words in English and Russian are<br />
pronounced with extra emphasis on one<br />
syllable, which is called “stress”.<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms. <strong>The</strong><br />
grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an adjective,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the adjective stem, the<br />
formation <strong>of</strong> the past participles.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
4
Term<br />
Alphabet<br />
Diphthong<br />
Phoneme<br />
Phonetics<br />
Stress<br />
Penult<br />
Antepenult<br />
Term<br />
Gender<br />
Number<br />
Case<br />
Declension<br />
Stem<br />
<strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />
Definition<br />
<strong>The</strong> graphic signs – letters arranged in the certain<br />
order.<br />
A combination <strong>of</strong> two vowels which are pronounced<br />
as one sound or one syllable.<br />
<strong>The</strong> minimum speech unit which is singled out <strong>of</strong> the<br />
continuous speech stream.<br />
<strong>The</strong> sound structure <strong>of</strong> the language; the branch <strong>of</strong><br />
linguistics which studies the sound structure <strong>of</strong> the<br />
language.<br />
Stress is an extra emphasis on one syllable in the<br />
words.<br />
Penult is the next to last syllable.<br />
Antepenult is the syllable before the penult.<br />
A term is a word or a word-combination which is a<br />
name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong><br />
science, production or arts.<br />
Masculine – genus masculinum (m); feminine –<br />
genus femininum (f); neuter – genus neutrum (n).<br />
When a noun names one thing, we say it in singular,<br />
when it names more than one thing, we say it in<br />
plural.<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
5
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />
and number.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants, diphthongs, letter<br />
combinations.<br />
2. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> stress, long and short syllables.<br />
3. Name the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing nouns in<br />
the vocabulary, the determination <strong>of</strong> the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong><br />
nouns.<br />
4. Name the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the adjectives, division into groups,<br />
gender endings, the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem.<br />
5. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> constructing and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
constructions “the agreed attribute”, morphological and syntactical structure<br />
<strong>of</strong> two- and many-word terms with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes.<br />
6. Name the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns, the paradigm,<br />
the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />
7. Name the prepositions used with Acc. and Abl., the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> using the<br />
prepositions in and sub. Give the example.<br />
8. Name the morphological signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives, the past<br />
participles, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing them in the vocabulary form.<br />
9. Name the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns, the<br />
1-st group adjectives, the word terminations.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Read correctly the words, underline the Greek prefixes and roots, explain<br />
their meaning: hypogastricus, myologia, polyvaccinum, salicylicus, pyrosis,<br />
otomycosis, dystonia, hypertonicus, glycerinum, oxydatus.<br />
6
2. Translate the terms from Latin into English:<br />
1) incisura clavicularis manubrii sterni<br />
2) vena obliqua artii sinistri<br />
3) nervus petrosus minor<br />
4) foramen venae cavae<br />
5) fovea costalis processus transversi<br />
6) vasa auris internae<br />
3. Translate the terms from English into Latin:<br />
1) anterior rib surface<br />
2) inferior joint process<br />
3) mucous membrane <strong>of</strong> the gallbladder<br />
4) joint surface <strong>of</strong> the rib tubercle<br />
5) incisure <strong>of</strong> the heart apex<br />
6) transverse nerve <strong>of</strong> the neck<br />
4. Form the clinical terms <strong>of</strong> separate terms-elements, translate them into<br />
English:<br />
I. 1) phleb(o) – (-logia, -logus, -graphia, -rrhaphia, -rrhagia, -ectasia, -<br />
ectomia, -spasmus);<br />
2) dactyl(o) – (-odynia, -scopia, -algia, -graphia);<br />
3) my(o) – (-cele, -plegia, -rrhaphia, -blastus, -algia).<br />
II. 1) -pathia (my-, encephal-, neur-, ophthalm-, aden-);<br />
2) -logia (bio-, phyt-, cyt-, hist-, aeti-);<br />
3) -algia (ophthalm-, mast-, cyst-, cholecyst-, neur-, my-).<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> theses <strong>of</strong> the topic’s contents<br />
1. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the alphabet, the rules <strong>of</strong> pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels and<br />
consonants, diphthongs, letter combinations.<br />
2. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the rules <strong>of</strong> stress, long and short syllables.<br />
7
3. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing<br />
nouns in the vocabulary, the determination <strong>of</strong> the stem, gender and<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> nouns.<br />
4. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the adjectives, division into<br />
groups, gender endings, the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem.<br />
5. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the rules <strong>of</strong> constructing and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
constructions “the agreed attribute”, morphological and syntactical structure<br />
<strong>of</strong> two- and many-word terms with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes.<br />
6. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns, the<br />
paradigm, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />
7. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the prepositions used with Acc. and Abl., the peculiarities <strong>of</strong><br />
using the prepositions in and sub. Give the example.<br />
8. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the morphological signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives, the past<br />
participles, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing them in the vocabulary form.<br />
9. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension<br />
nouns, the 1-st group adjectives, the word terminations.<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />
aegrotus, a, um – homo, inis m<br />
tela, ae f<br />
cella, ae f<br />
cor, cordis n<br />
organismus, i m<br />
hepar, atis n<br />
ventriculus, i m<br />
8
organon, i n<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Translate the terms into Latin:<br />
a) vertebra (thoracic, coccygeal, sacral, superficial, cervical);<br />
b) tubercle (anterior, posterior, carotic, pharyngeous, articular);<br />
c) fracture <strong>of</strong> the scapula, clavicle, vertebrae, ribs; good method; deep petrous<br />
nerve; transverse diameter; right (left) eye; the skull cavity; mandible <strong>of</strong> the<br />
breastbone.<br />
Task № 3.<br />
Translate the word-combinations with prepositions into Latin:<br />
1) in the external plate<br />
2) through the veins<br />
3) with the colleague<br />
4) between the vertebrae<br />
5) under the right scapula<br />
6) in capsules, in tablets, in ampoules<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Determine how the italicized letters (letter combinations) are pronounced:<br />
1) aёr 6) Iodum<br />
2) aeger 7) exitus<br />
3) iugularis 8) Aloё<br />
4) lagoena 9) Xer<strong>of</strong>ormium<br />
5) oxydum 10) paediater<br />
<strong>The</strong> variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
9
a) ae; b) oe; c) e; d) i; e) j; f) ks; g) kz.<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Determine the stressed syllables:<br />
vertebra; maxilla; glutaeus; limpidus; tunica; cavernosus; incisura; dilutus;<br />
ventriculus; stomachus; apertura, capitulum; pelvinus; cerebrum; acidum.<br />
a) penult; b) antepenult.<br />
Test № 3.<br />
Find the mistakes in the agreement <strong>of</strong> the adjectives with the nouns:<br />
1) diameter transverses; 2) brachium dexter; 3) periodus criticus; 4) nervus carotica;<br />
5) methodus bonus; 6) labium superior.<br />
Test № 4.<br />
Add the corresponding ending instead <strong>of</strong> the dots:<br />
1) apertura sin … sphenoidalis<br />
2) basis ossis sacr …<br />
3) lamina et foramin … cribrosa<br />
4) oss … membri superioris<br />
5) facies articularis tuberculi cost …<br />
6) facies posterior part … petrosae<br />
7) pediculus arc … vertebrae<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />
a) –us; b) –i; c) –is; d) –a; e) –ae.<br />
Test № 5.<br />
Find the mistakes in the spelling <strong>of</strong> the terms, if there are any:<br />
10
1) ophtalmoscopia, 2) hystologia, 3) encephalomalacia, 4) toxemia, 5)<br />
dysphagia, 6) pharmacoterapia, 7) neuralgia, 8) rinorhagia, 9) citopenia, 10)<br />
histeropexia.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
11
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histological terms”<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th declension<br />
nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />
comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />
<strong>The</strong> third declension nouns. <strong>The</strong> determination <strong>of</strong><br />
stem, types, paradigm <strong>of</strong> all genders.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
In the system <strong>of</strong> Latin declensions the third declension is the most widespread<br />
and at the same time difficult for mastering. If in the nouns <strong>of</strong> the 1-sr, 2-nd, 4-th<br />
and 5-th declensions the gender is determined by the ending <strong>of</strong> Nom. sing., while<br />
determining the gender <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension nouns it is necessary to know not<br />
only the ending <strong>of</strong> Nom. sing., but also to take into consideration the typical<br />
endings <strong>of</strong> the stem in Gen sing., since just these endings are indicators <strong>of</strong> the noun<br />
gender (salus, salutis f, but ulcus, ulceris n; pes, pedis m, but tabes, tabis f etc.).<br />
While mastering this topic a special attention should be paid to the noun<br />
stem, as the most 3-rd declension nouns have a short stem in Nom. sing., but it<br />
shows itself in full only in Gen. sing.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
To know :<br />
−<br />
−<br />
the formal signs <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension nouns;<br />
the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing the 3-rd declension nouns in the vocabulary<br />
(including monosyllabic nouns);<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem <strong>of</strong> nouns;<br />
the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the consonant type;<br />
the case endings <strong>of</strong> the consonant type;<br />
the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the vowel type;<br />
the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the case endings <strong>of</strong> the vowel type;<br />
the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the mixed type;<br />
the peculiarity <strong>of</strong> the declining <strong>of</strong> the mixed type nouns;<br />
the group <strong>of</strong> nouns which are declined by the consonant type while having<br />
the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the mixed type.<br />
To know how:<br />
- to distinguish parisyllabic and imparisyllabic nouns;<br />
- to determine the practical stem and the stem type <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension<br />
nouns;<br />
- to decline the nouns belonging to the consonant, vowel and mixed types.<br />
3
To master: the lexical minimum <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension nouns (30 units).<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines <strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
1. Case.<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
2. Declension.<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
3. Stem.<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
4. Parisyllabic nouns. removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns having an equal number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />
5. Imparisyllabic nouns. Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns having a different number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />
Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
4
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. Name the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the third declension nouns.<br />
2. What is the peculiarity <strong>of</strong> writing the third declension nouns in the<br />
vocabulary?<br />
3. How is the stem <strong>of</strong> nouns found?<br />
4. What nouns belong to the parisyllabic ones?<br />
5. What nouns belong to the imparisyllabic ones?<br />
6. What are the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the consonant type nouns?<br />
7. Name the case endings <strong>of</strong> the consonant type.<br />
8. What are the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the vowel type nouns?<br />
9. What are the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the vowel type nouns?<br />
10. What nouns belong to the mixed type?<br />
11. What is the difference <strong>of</strong> the mixed type from the consonant one?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Determine, which <strong>of</strong> the given nouns belong to the imparisyllabic ones and which<br />
– to parisyllabic ones:<br />
1) axis, is m; 2) os, ossis n; 3) apis, is f; 4) apex, icis m; 5) os, oris n; 6) rete, is n; 7)<br />
cutis, is f; 8) cor, cordis n; 9) pes, pedis m; 10) naris, is f.<br />
2. Determine the type <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the nouns, given in the previous task.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> masculine, feminine and neuter nouns having different endings in Nom.<br />
sing. and the typical ending –is in Gen. sing. belong to the third declension. <strong>The</strong><br />
third declension nouns are subdivided into parisyllabic and imparisyllabic ones. <strong>The</strong><br />
parisyllabic nouns have the same number <strong>of</strong> syllables in Nom. sing. and Gen. sing.,<br />
the imparisyllabic ones have one syllable more in Gen. sing. than in Nom. sing.<br />
While studying the third declension nouns it is necessary to pay a special<br />
attention to the finding <strong>of</strong> stem, as it is short in Nom. sing. and shows itself in full<br />
5
only in Gen. sing. Besides it should be remembered that one-syllable nouns are<br />
written in full in Nom. sing. and Gen. sing., e. g.: cor, cordis n (heart); dens, dentis<br />
m (tooth); pars, parties f (part); os, ossis n (bone); os, oris n (mouth).<br />
Depending on the stem ending, the third declension nouns are subdivided into<br />
three types: consonant, vowel and mixed ones.<br />
<strong>The</strong> consonant type.<br />
<strong>The</strong> imparisyllabic nouns <strong>of</strong> all genders, whose stem ends in one consonant,<br />
belong to the consonant type. This type is the basic and most widely spread one. E.<br />
g.: flos, floris m; radix, īcis f; os, oris n.<br />
Table № 1.<br />
<strong>The</strong> case endings <strong>of</strong> the consonant type<br />
Casus Singularis Pluralis<br />
Nom.<br />
Gen.<br />
Dat.<br />
Acc.<br />
Abl.<br />
different<br />
-is<br />
-i<br />
-em (m, f), as Nom. (n)<br />
-e<br />
-es (m, f), -a (n)<br />
-um<br />
-ĭbus<br />
-es (m, f), -a (n)<br />
-ĭbus<br />
<strong>The</strong> vowel type.<br />
<strong>The</strong> neuter nouns having the endings -e, -al, -ar in Nom. sing. belong to the<br />
vowel type. E. g.: rete, is n (net), animal, ālis n (animal), cochlear, āris n (spoon).<br />
<strong>The</strong> attention should be paid to the noun hepar, ătis n (liver) which is declined<br />
according to the consonant type.<br />
6
<strong>The</strong> case endings <strong>of</strong> the vowel type have the following differences from the<br />
consonant type:<br />
1) Abb. sing. -i (instead <strong>of</strong> -e);<br />
2) Nom. plur. and Acc. plur. -ia (instead <strong>of</strong> -a);<br />
3) Gen. plur -ium (instead <strong>of</strong> -um).<br />
Though the vowel type is not widely spread in the Latin medical terminology,<br />
it is necessary to memorize its peculiarities, because the second group adjectives are<br />
declined according to this type.<br />
<strong>The</strong> mixed type.<br />
Two groups <strong>of</strong> nouns belong to the mixed type:<br />
a) the parisyllabic nouns <strong>of</strong> masculine and feminine genders having the<br />
endings -es or -is in Nom. sing. E. g.: auris, is f (ear); canalis, is m<br />
(channel); fames, is f (hunger);<br />
b) the imparisyllabic nouns <strong>of</strong> all genders, whose stem ends in two<br />
consonant, e. g.: dens, dentis m (tooth) => stem dent-; pars, parties<br />
f (part) => stem part-: os, ossis n (bone) => stem oss-; here belong<br />
also formally parisyllabic nouns, whose stem ends in three<br />
consonants. E. g.: venter, tris m (belly) => stem ventr-.<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns <strong>of</strong> the mixed type have the ending -ium (instead <strong>of</strong> -um) in Gen.<br />
plur. <strong>The</strong> rest <strong>of</strong> case endings don’t differ from the case endings <strong>of</strong> the consonant<br />
type.<br />
It is necessary to remember that some nouns, which have formal signs <strong>of</strong> the<br />
mixed type, are declined by the consonant type, e. g.: mater, tris f (mother; meninx);<br />
pater, tris m (father); canis, is m, f (dog).<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
7
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Fill in the table:<br />
Abl.<br />
Abl.<br />
Nom.<br />
Nom.<br />
Nom.<br />
Gen.<br />
Gen.<br />
sing.<br />
sing.<br />
plur.<br />
plur.<br />
plur.<br />
plur.<br />
plur.<br />
-e<br />
-i<br />
-es<br />
-a<br />
-ia<br />
-um<br />
-um<br />
1. ren, renis m<br />
2. rete, is n<br />
3. pes, pedis m<br />
4. aurus, is f<br />
5. secale, is, n<br />
6. flos, floris m<br />
7. mater, tris f<br />
8. corpus, oris n<br />
9. pars, parties f<br />
10. canalis, is m<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
<strong>The</strong> third declension nouns are subdivided into:<br />
a) three types <strong>of</strong> declining;<br />
b) two types <strong>of</strong> declining;<br />
c) four types <strong>of</strong> declining.<br />
Test № 2.<br />
<strong>The</strong> stem <strong>of</strong> nouns is found by dropping:<br />
a) <strong>of</strong> the ending Nom. sing.;<br />
b) <strong>of</strong> the ending Gen. sing.;<br />
c) <strong>of</strong> the ending Abl. sing.<br />
8
Test № 3.<br />
Fill in the table.<br />
Case ending<br />
Type<br />
consonant vowel mixed<br />
Abl. sing. -e<br />
Abl. sing. -i<br />
Nom., Acc. plur. -a<br />
Nom., Acc. plur. -ia<br />
Gen. plur. -um<br />
Gen. plur. -ium<br />
9
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
10
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision<br />
<strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />
anatomic and histological terms”<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th<br />
declension nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the<br />
degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />
<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the first group adjectives<br />
with the 3 rd declension nouns.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Adjectives are as important as nouns in terms. Most <strong>of</strong> anatomic terms are the<br />
combinations <strong>of</strong> nouns with adjectives. <strong>The</strong> great number <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />
pharmaceutical terms are the combinations <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd declension nouns with the 1 st<br />
group adjectives (cor sanum, pars magna, radix cariosa, tumor benignus etc.)<br />
Mastering <strong>of</strong> the rules <strong>of</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 1 st group adjectives with the 3 rd<br />
declension nouns helps to students to correcty form anatomic and pharmaceutical<br />
terms.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know the morphological signs <strong>of</strong> the 1 st group adjectives.<br />
2. To know what nouns belong to the 3 rd declension.<br />
3. To know how to agree the 1 st group adjectives with masculine nouns <strong>of</strong><br />
the 3 rd declension.<br />
4. To know how to agree the 1 st group adjectives with feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />
3 rd declension.<br />
5. To know how to agree the 1 st group adjectives with neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd<br />
declension.<br />
6. To master the habits <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> medical terms from Latin into<br />
English and on the contrary.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun<br />
and an adjective, the description <strong>of</strong><br />
declensions, the determination <strong>of</strong> the<br />
noun and adjective stem.<br />
3
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
1. Case.<br />
2. Declension.<br />
3. Stem.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />
Definition<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />
and number.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1) What adjectives belong to the 1 st group?<br />
2) What nouns belong to the 3 rd declension?<br />
3) How are the 1 st group adjectives agreed with the masculine nouns <strong>of</strong><br />
the 3 rd declension?<br />
4) How are the 1 st group adjectives agreed with the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />
3 rd declension?<br />
5) How are the 1 st group adjectives agreed with the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd<br />
declension?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
4
1. Translate the terms into English:<br />
1. Axis opticus. 2. Sanguis venosus and arteriosus. 3. Pancreas<br />
accessorium. 4. Systema nervosum. 5. Ren dexter and sinister. 6.<br />
Vas lymphaticum. 7. Cutis sicca. 8. Canalis nutritius. 9. Injectio<br />
subcutanea. 10. Tumor malignus.<br />
2. Translate the terms into Latin:<br />
1. Acute pain. 2. Coccygeal bone. 3. Right and left femur. 4.<br />
Pr<strong>of</strong>ound head. 5. Long extremity. 6. Lymphatic system. 7.<br />
Middle ear. 8. Small tuber. 9. Right foot. 10. Black pepper.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic`s contents:<br />
Graph № 1.<br />
<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 1 st group adjectives with the masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />
third declension.<br />
pulmo, onis m<br />
left lung<br />
sinister, tra, trum<br />
flos, oris m<br />
white flower<br />
albus, a, um<br />
dens, dentis m<br />
carious tooth<br />
cariosus, a, um<br />
Graph № 2.<br />
5
<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 1 st group adjectives with the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the third<br />
declension<br />
pars, parties f<br />
petrous part<br />
petrosus, a, um<br />
extremitas, atis f<br />
right extremity<br />
dexter, tra, trum<br />
injectio, onis f<br />
subcutaneous injection<br />
subcutaneus, a, um<br />
Graph № 3.<br />
<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 1 st group adjectives with the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the third<br />
declension<br />
crus, uris n<br />
left crus<br />
sinister, tra, trum<br />
systema, atis n<br />
nervous system<br />
nervosus, a, um<br />
caput, itis n<br />
long head<br />
longus, a, um<br />
6
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />
1) foramen, inis n (round, palatine, incised, large);<br />
2) rete, is n (venous, arterial, long, cutaneous);<br />
3) os, ossis n (zygomatic, palatine, wide, long, tympanic, hyoid);<br />
4) margo, inis m (zygomatic, squamous, interosseal, lambdoid);<br />
5) pars, rtis f (petrous, right, left, spinous)<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Decline the terms in Sing. and Plur.:<br />
1) canalis opticus – optic canal;<br />
2) tuberositas deltoidea – deltoid tuberosity;<br />
Task № 3.<br />
Put the terms in Gen.sing. and Nom. plur.:<br />
1) ulcus chronicum – chronic ulcer;<br />
2) radix cariosa – carious root;<br />
3) homo sanus – healthy man;<br />
4) symptoma periculosum – dangerous symptom;<br />
5) paries internus – internal wall;<br />
6) solutio spirituosa – spirituous solution.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd declension nouns:<br />
7
1) margo, inis . . .; 2) os, ossis . . .; 3) apex, icis . . . ; 4) phalanx, ngis . . . ; 5)<br />
pulmo. onis . . ; 6) cor, cordis . . . ; 7) systema, atis . . . ; 8) corpus, oris . . . ;<br />
9) pes, pedis . . . ; 10) dens, dentis . . . ; 11) auris, is . . . ; 12) radix, icis . . ..<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />
a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum<br />
Test № 2<br />
Determine the group and declension <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />
1) latus, a, um; 2) acer, acris, acre; 3) liber, are, erum; 4) pr<strong>of</strong>undus, a, um; 5)<br />
dexter, tra, trum; 6) medius, a, um; 7) saluber, bris, bre; 8) asper, era, erum; 9)<br />
ruber, bra, brum; 10) longus, a, um; 11) celer, eris, ere; 12) squamosus, a, um.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />
a) 1 st group b) 2 nd group<br />
Test № 3<br />
Find the correct ending for the adjectives:<br />
1) pars petros . . .; 2) foramen rotund . . .; 3) paries extern . . .; 4) os<br />
hyoide . . .; 5) homo san . . .; 6) abdomen acut . . .; 7) canalis optic .<br />
. .; 8) tumor benign . . .; 9) tuberositas deltoide . . .; 10) margo<br />
interosse . . .; 11) cutis sicc . . .; 12) pancreas accessori . . ..<br />
a) –us b) –a c) –um<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
8
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
9
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histological terms”<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th declension<br />
nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />
comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />
<strong>The</strong> consonant type. <strong>The</strong> masculine gender. <strong>The</strong><br />
exceptions. <strong>The</strong> stable combinations. <strong>The</strong><br />
vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> systematization and processing <strong>of</strong> the lexico-grammatival material helps to<br />
realize the main purpose <strong>of</strong> teaching Latin in <strong>higher</strong> medical <strong>educational</strong><br />
<strong>establishment</strong> – the practical mastering <strong>of</strong> medical terminology as a whole and its<br />
separate branches (anatomic, histologic, clinical, pharmaceutical).<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
To master:<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
the masculine endings <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension nouns;<br />
the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender;<br />
the suffixes <strong>of</strong> masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension;<br />
the Latin-Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension.<br />
To know how:<br />
- to agree the 1-st group adjectives with the masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />
declension and exceptions;<br />
- to form terms-composites <strong>of</strong> the given terms-elements;<br />
- to analyze the terms-composites.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />
integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />
3
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
1. Case.<br />
2. Declension.<br />
3. Stem.<br />
4. Parisyllabic nouns.<br />
5. Imparisyllabic nouns.<br />
Definition<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns having an equal number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />
Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns having a different number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />
Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What are the endings <strong>of</strong> the masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension in<br />
Nom. sing. and Gen, sing.?<br />
2. What are the exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> masculine gender?<br />
3. What are the suffixes <strong>of</strong> the masculine nouns and their meaning? Give<br />
examples.<br />
4. Name the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin 3-rd declension masculine nouns<br />
and word terminations.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
4
1. Add Gen. sing. to the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> these masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-<br />
rd declension:<br />
cortex, tumor, sapo, pollex, vomer, pes, aër, index, venter, flexor.<br />
2. Translate into English, write down and learn the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the<br />
words:<br />
1) Paries cardiacus. 2) Apex cordis. 3) Trochanter major et minor. 4)<br />
Musculus depressor anguli oris. 5) Cor bovinum. 6) Dolor ventris. 7) Gaster<br />
aegra. 8) Quies absoluta.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension have the following endings in<br />
Nom.sing.: -o (except those nouns which end in -io, -do, -go), -or, -os, -er, -es<br />
(imparisyllabic), -ex.<br />
It is necessary to memorize also the endings <strong>of</strong> genitive singular.<br />
Nom. sing.<br />
-o<br />
Endings<br />
Gen. sing.<br />
-ōnis<br />
-ĭnis<br />
Examples<br />
pulmo, pulmōnis m – lung<br />
homo, homĭnis m – man<br />
-or<br />
-oris<br />
dolor, dolōris m – pain<br />
-os<br />
-oris<br />
flos, floris m – flower<br />
-er<br />
-(t)ris<br />
-ĕris<br />
-ēris<br />
venter, ventris m – venter<br />
aether, aethĕris m – ether<br />
trochanter, trochantēris m – trochanter<br />
5
-es<br />
(imparisyllabic)<br />
-ĕtis<br />
-edis<br />
paries, pariĕtis m – paries<br />
pes, pedis m – foot<br />
-ex<br />
-gis<br />
-ĭcis<br />
rex, regis m – king, ruler<br />
apex, apĭcis m – top<br />
<strong>The</strong> exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> masculine gender<br />
Some nouns with masculine endings belong to feminine or neuter genders.<br />
<strong>The</strong>y are exceptions, memorize them.<br />
Feminine gender: gaster, gastris f – stomach<br />
mater, matris f – mother; meninx<br />
quies,quiētis f – rest; peace<br />
lex, legis f – law<br />
Neuter gender:<br />
cor, cordis n – heart<br />
os, oris n – mouth<br />
os, ossis n – bone<br />
tuber, tubĕris n – tuber<br />
<strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> masculine nouns<br />
-or<br />
– points to the physical or mental <strong>state</strong>, e. g.: dolor, ōris m – pain;<br />
timor, ōris m – fear; liquor, ōris m – liquid;<br />
-sor, -tor<br />
– mean a person or a subject performing some action, e. g.: lector,<br />
ōris m – lecturer; doctor, ōris m – doctor, scientist; levator, ōris<br />
m – levator (muscle); depressor, ōris m – depressor (muscle).<br />
6
<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents<br />
<strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension masculine nouns<br />
Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />
calor, ōris m<br />
color, ōris m<br />
homo, ĭnis m<br />
pes, pedis m<br />
pulmo, ōnis m<br />
sudor, ōris m<br />
tumor, ōris m<br />
thermchrom-,<br />
chromatanthroppodpneum-,<br />
pneumonhidronc-<br />
heat; warmth<br />
colour<br />
man; human being<br />
foot<br />
lung<br />
sweat, perspiration<br />
tumour<br />
Exceptions<br />
cor, cordis n<br />
mater, tris f<br />
os, oris n<br />
os, ossis n<br />
cardimeningstomatoste-,<br />
ost-<br />
heart<br />
meninx<br />
mouth<br />
bone<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Agree adjectives with nouns, translate the terms:<br />
1) tumor, ōris m – tumour (benign, malignant); 2) pes, pedis m – foot (right,<br />
left); 3) os, ossis n – bone (zygomatic, palatine, hyoid, wide); 4) paries, ĕtis m –<br />
paries (front, back, external, internal); 5) flos, floris m – flower (white, yellow, red);<br />
6) homo, ĭnis m – man (good, sick, healthy).<br />
7
Task № 2.<br />
Translate into Latin, learn the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the words:<br />
1) <strong>The</strong> top <strong>of</strong> the left lung. 2) <strong>The</strong> bones <strong>of</strong> the foot. 3) <strong>The</strong> acute pain. 4) <strong>The</strong><br />
right lung, the left lung. 5) <strong>The</strong> tuber <strong>of</strong> the maxilla. 6) <strong>The</strong> tumour <strong>of</strong> the brain. 7)<br />
Through the mouth, through the rectum.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Determine the type <strong>of</strong> stem <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
1) phalanx, ngis f; 2) pater, tris m: 3) fames, is f; 4) homo, ĭnis m; 5) hepar,<br />
ătis n; 6) exemplar, aris n; 7) ulcus, ĕris n; 8) solutio, ōnis f; 9) secale, is n; 10)<br />
dens, dentis m; 11) canalis, is m; 12) rete, is n; 13) cuspis, ĭdis f; 14) cutis, is f; 15)<br />
os, oris n.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />
a) consonant; b) vowel; c) mixed.<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Add the corresponding endings instead <strong>of</strong> dots:<br />
1. In apic… pulmon… sinistr…<br />
2. Foetor ex or…<br />
3. Pro auctor…<br />
4. Apex oss… sacr…<br />
5. Incisura cardiaca pulmon… sinistr…<br />
6. Cavum or…<br />
7. Dolor acut… in regione cord…<br />
8. Planta ped…<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
8
a) –is; b) –i; c) –e; d) –us.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
9
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 1<br />
Content module № 3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histological terms”<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th declension<br />
nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />
comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />
<strong>The</strong> vowel type, the neuter gender endings. <strong>The</strong><br />
exceptions. <strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> some<br />
neuter gender words – vas, gramma etc. <strong>The</strong><br />
vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents. <strong>The</strong><br />
stable combinations.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension are <strong>of</strong>ten met in the anatomic<br />
terminology. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents and suffixes <strong>of</strong> the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />
3-rd declension, on the base <strong>of</strong> which many clinical terms are formed, are not less<br />
important and widely-used.<br />
<strong>The</strong> detailed learning <strong>of</strong> the neuter endings <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension with the typical<br />
endings <strong>of</strong> Gen. sing., the Greek-Latin equivalents and suffixes promotes the<br />
enrichment <strong>of</strong> the students' vocabulary, the consolidation <strong>of</strong> the habits <strong>of</strong><br />
grammatically correct and well-considered use <strong>of</strong> medical terms.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the vowel type.<br />
2. To know the typical endings <strong>of</strong> the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension in<br />
Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
3. To know the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender in the vocabulary form.<br />
4. To know the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />
declension and word terminations.<br />
5. To know the most important suffixes <strong>of</strong> the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />
declension nouns.<br />
6. To know the stable combinations with the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />
declension.<br />
7. To know how to determine the gender and the stem type <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />
declension neuter nouns.<br />
8. To know how to agree the 1-st group adjectives with the 3-rd declension<br />
neuter nouns and the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />
9. To know how to translate the terms with the 3-rd declension neuter nouns and<br />
the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />
10. To know how to form the clinical terms with the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong><br />
the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension and the suffixes, to translate the terms<br />
from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />
3
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />
integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
1. Case.<br />
2. Declension.<br />
3. Stem.<br />
4. Parisyllabic nouns.<br />
5. Imparisyllabic nouns.<br />
Definition<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns having an equal number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />
Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns having a different number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />
Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
4
1. What are the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining the nouns <strong>of</strong> the vowel type?<br />
2. What are the endings <strong>of</strong> neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension in Nom. sing.<br />
and Gen. sing.?<br />
3. What are the exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> neuter gender?<br />
4. What are the suffixes <strong>of</strong> neuter nouns and their meaning? Give examples.<br />
5. Name the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin 3-rd declension neuter nouns and<br />
word terminations.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Translate the terms into English, write down and learn the vocabulary<br />
form <strong>of</strong> the words:<br />
1). Ulcus chronicum. 2) Abdomen acutum. 3) Systema nervosum. 4) Crus<br />
dextrum et sinistrum. 5) Corpus hominis. 6) Foramen caecum linguae. 7) Cavitas<br />
abdominis. 8) Ren dexter et sinister. 9) Ossa capitis. 10) Lobus hepatis. 11) Corpus<br />
linguae. 12) Ligamentum capĭtis femŏris.<br />
2. Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />
1) corpus, oris n – body (yellow, adipose, callous); 2) f<strong>of</strong>amen, inis n –<br />
foramen (round, palatine, incisive, big, nutritional, optic); 3) systema, atis n –<br />
system (nervous, lymphatic, peripheral, digestive, respiratory); 4) rete, is n – net<br />
(long, venous, arterial, cutaneous); 5) ulcus, ěris n – ulcer (callous, chronic,<br />
cutaneous, malignant, benign).<br />
3. Translate the terms into Latin, learn the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the words:<br />
5
1) <strong>The</strong> ulcer <strong>of</strong> the duodenum and stomach. 2) <strong>The</strong> sick kidneys. 3) <strong>The</strong><br />
dangerous trauma. 4) <strong>The</strong> cavity <strong>of</strong> the abdomen. 5) <strong>The</strong> lacerated foramen <strong>of</strong> the<br />
breast.<br />
4. Form the nouns with the suffix –oma, explain their meaning:<br />
1) derma, derm- (skin); 2) mys, my- (muscle); 3) fibra, fibr- (fiber); 4) odus,<br />
odont- (tooth); 5) sarx, sarc- (meat).<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension have the endings <strong>of</strong> Nom. sing. and<br />
Gen. sing. shown in the table below.<br />
Nom. sing.<br />
-e<br />
Endings<br />
Gen. sing.<br />
-is<br />
rete, retis n – net<br />
Examples<br />
-l<br />
-lis<br />
fel, fellis n – gall<br />
-ar<br />
-āris<br />
-ătis<br />
cochlear, cochleāris n – spoon<br />
hepar, hepătis n – liver<br />
-ur<br />
-ŏris<br />
-ŭris<br />
femur, femŏris n – thigh<br />
guttur, gutturis n – throat<br />
-us<br />
-ŏris<br />
-ūris<br />
-ěris<br />
corpus, corpŏris n – body<br />
crus, cruris n – shin<br />
ulcus, ulcěris n – ulcer<br />
6
-t<br />
-ĭtis<br />
caput, capĭtis n – head<br />
-c<br />
-tis<br />
lac, lactis n – milk<br />
-ma<br />
-ătis<br />
asthma, asthmătis n – asthma<br />
-en<br />
-ĭnis<br />
abdomen, abdomĭnis n – abdomen<br />
<strong>The</strong> exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> neuter gender<br />
sol, solis m – sun<br />
lien, lienis m – (Latin) spleen<br />
splen, splenis m – (Greek) spleen<br />
ren, renis m – kidney<br />
aden, aděnis m – gland<br />
<strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension<br />
-oma – points to the presence <strong>of</strong> tumour, e. g.: adenoma, ătis n – adenoma;<br />
myoma, ătis n – muscle tumour;<br />
-ema – points to the presence <strong>of</strong> rash, abscesses etc., e. g.: erythema, ătis n –<br />
erythema; exanthema, ătis n – exanthema;<br />
-men – means the consequence <strong>of</strong> action, e. g.: nomen, ĭnis n<br />
foramen, ĭnis n – foramen.<br />
<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension neuter nouns<br />
– name;<br />
7
Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />
abdomen, ĭnis n<br />
caput, ĭtis n<br />
corpus, ŏris n<br />
lac, lactis n<br />
pectus, ŏris n<br />
pus, puris n<br />
viscus, ěris n<br />
laparcephal-,<br />
kephalsom-,<br />
somatgalactstethpysplanchn-<br />
Exceptions<br />
abdomen<br />
head<br />
body<br />
milk<br />
breast, chest<br />
pus<br />
internal organ;<br />
viscera<br />
lien, ēnis m<br />
ren, renis m<br />
sol, solis m<br />
splen-<br />
nephr-<br />
heli-<br />
spleen<br />
kidney<br />
sun<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Agree the adjectives with the nouns and translate the terms into English:<br />
1) animal, alis n (domesticus, a, um)<br />
2) femur, oris n (sinister, tra, trum)<br />
3) crus, cruris n (dexter, tra, trum)<br />
4) caput, itis n (longus, a, um)<br />
5) abdomen, inis n (acutus, a, um)<br />
6) symptoma, atis n (certus, a, um; incertus, a, um)<br />
7) corpus, oris n (adiposus, a, um)<br />
8) cor, cordis n (sanus, a, um)<br />
8
Task № 2.<br />
Translate the terms into Latin:<br />
nervous system, chronic ulcer, arterial vessel, long net, fracture <strong>of</strong> the thigh,<br />
foramen <strong>of</strong> the skull, long muscle <strong>of</strong> the head, disease <strong>of</strong> the nervous system, left<br />
lobe <strong>of</strong> the liver, edema <strong>of</strong> the lung, blood vessel, lymphatic vessel.<br />
Task № 3.<br />
Form the clinical terms and translate into English:<br />
I.<br />
1) lapar- (-tomia, -scopia, -algia, -rrhagia);<br />
2) splanchn- (-logia, -ectomia, -scopia, -algia);<br />
3) hepat- (-megalia, -ectomia, -therapia).<br />
II.<br />
1) -mycosis (bronch-, stomat-, dermat-);<br />
2) -lysis (chondr-, neur-, hydr-, haemat-);<br />
3) -ptosis (gastr-, nephr-, proct-, enter-).<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
1) ren, renis… ; 2) animal, alis… ; 3) rete, is… ; 4) calcar, aris… ; 5) splen,<br />
enis… ; 6) femur, oris… ; 7) phren, enis… ; 8) caput, it is… ; 9) systema, atis… ;<br />
10) cor, cordis… ; 11) pulmo, onis… ; 12) pes, pedis…<br />
9
neutrum.<br />
a) masculinum; b) femininum; c)<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Add the correct endings:<br />
1) ossa capit… homin…<br />
2) angina pector…<br />
3) corpus lingu…<br />
4) symptomat… morbi<br />
5) neoplasma benign…<br />
6) sulfur depurat…<br />
7) foramina nutriti…<br />
8) cavum abdomin…<br />
9) ulcus duoden…<br />
10) plasma sanguine…<br />
<strong>The</strong> variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
a) –a; b) –ae; c) –us; d) –is; e) –um; f) –i.<br />
Test № 3.<br />
Find the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms:<br />
1) splanchnoptosis a) extraction <strong>of</strong> the kidney<br />
2) splenomalacia b) examining <strong>of</strong> the body<br />
3) nephrectomia c) sinking down <strong>of</strong> the liver<br />
4) adenoma d) blood tumor<br />
5) somatoscopia e) bleeding <strong>of</strong> the kidney<br />
6) haematoma f) sinking down <strong>of</strong> the inner<br />
organs<br />
7) cephalalgia g) cutting <strong>of</strong> the abdomen<br />
10
8) nephrorrhagia h) headache<br />
9) hepatoptosis i) tumor <strong>of</strong> the gland<br />
10) laparotomia j) s<strong>of</strong>tening <strong>of</strong> the spleen<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
11
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 1<br />
Content module № 3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histological terms”<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th declension<br />
nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />
comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />
<strong>The</strong> feminine gender endings. <strong>The</strong> exceptions. <strong>The</strong><br />
vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong><br />
feminine gender. <strong>The</strong> stable combinations.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension are <strong>of</strong>ten met in the anatomic<br />
terminology. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents and suffixes <strong>of</strong> the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong><br />
the 3-rd declension, on the base <strong>of</strong> which many clinical terms are formed, are not<br />
less important and widely-used.<br />
<strong>The</strong> detailed learning <strong>of</strong> the feminine endings <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension with the typical<br />
endings <strong>of</strong> Gen. sing., the Greek-Latin equivalents and suffixes promotes the<br />
enrichment <strong>of</strong> the students' vocabulary, the consolidation <strong>of</strong> the habits <strong>of</strong><br />
grammatically correct and well-considered use <strong>of</strong> medical terms.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know the typical endings <strong>of</strong> the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension in<br />
Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
2. To know the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender in the vocabulary form.<br />
3. To know the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />
declension and word terminations.<br />
4. To know the most important suffixes <strong>of</strong> the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />
declension nouns.<br />
5. To know the stable combinations with the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />
declension.<br />
6. To know how to determine the gender and the stem type <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />
declension feminine nouns.<br />
7. To know how to agree the 1-st group adjectives with the 3-rd declension<br />
feminine nouns and the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />
8. To know how to translate the terms with the 3-rd declension feminine nouns<br />
and the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />
9. To know how to form the clinical terms with the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong><br />
the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension and the suffixes, to translate the<br />
terms from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />
3
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />
integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
1. Case.<br />
2. Declension.<br />
3. Stem.<br />
4. Parisyllabic nouns.<br />
5. Imparisyllabic nouns.<br />
Definition<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns having an equal number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />
Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns having a different number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />
Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
4
1. What are the endings <strong>of</strong> feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension in Nom.<br />
sing. and Gen. sing.?<br />
2. What are the exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> feminine gender?<br />
3. What are the suffixes <strong>of</strong> feminine nouns and their meaning? Give<br />
examples.<br />
4. Name the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin 3-rd declension feminine nouns<br />
and word terminations.<br />
<strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Translate the terms into English, write down and learn the vocabulary<br />
form <strong>of</strong> the words:<br />
1) Tuberositas deltoidea. 2) Radix pulmonis. 3) Extremitas claviculae. 4)<br />
Cartilago thyreoidea. 5) Basis cranii externa. 6) Pars petrosa. 7) Cutis sicca. 8)<br />
Articulatio composita. 9) Cavitas pelvis. 10) Operatio chirurgica. 11) Extractio<br />
dentium. 12) Transfusio sanguinis. 13) Cuspis dentis. 14) Radix duplex. 15)<br />
Injectio intravenosa. 16) Solutio spirituosa.<br />
2. Translate the terms into Latin, write down and learn the vocabulary form<br />
<strong>of</strong> the words:<br />
1) <strong>The</strong> venous blood, the arterial blood. 2) <strong>The</strong> optic axis. 3) <strong>The</strong> cartilages <strong>of</strong><br />
the larynx. 4) <strong>The</strong> blood vessel, the lymphatic vessel. 5) <strong>The</strong> examination <strong>of</strong> a<br />
patient. 6) <strong>The</strong> middle phalanx. 7) <strong>The</strong> body <strong>of</strong> the atlas. 8) <strong>The</strong> healthy teeth.<br />
3. Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />
1) pars, partis f – part (tympanic, petrous, squamate); 2) margo, inis m –<br />
margin (interosseous, zygomatic, front); 3) canalis, is m – channel (optic,<br />
nutritional, incisive, pterygoid); 4) dens, dentis m – tooth (lactic, incisive, carious,<br />
deciduous); 5) auris, is f – ear (external, internal, middle).<br />
5
4. Analyse the terms, translate them into English:<br />
1) pododynia (podalgia); 2) myocardiodystrophia; 3) gastrorrhaphia; 4)<br />
cardiomyopathia; 5) hidrorrhoea; 6) stomatologus; 7) otorhinolaryngologus; 8)<br />
stenothorax; 9) pyelotomia; 10) uropoësis; 11) pneumolўsis; 12) angiocarditis; 13)<br />
gastrorrhexis; 14) desmolўsis; 15) anthropogen ěsis; 16) enterostenosis; 17)<br />
odontopoësis; 18) phlebosclerosis; 19) polyarthritis.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension have the endings <strong>of</strong> Nom. sing.<br />
and Gen. sing. shown in the table.<br />
Endings<br />
Examples<br />
Nom. sing. Gen. sing.<br />
-io<br />
-do<br />
-go<br />
-ōnis<br />
-ĭnis<br />
-ĭnis<br />
solutio, solutiōnis f – solution<br />
valetudo, valetudĭnis f – health<br />
cartilago, cartilagĭnis f – cartilage<br />
-as<br />
-ātis<br />
extremitas, extremitātis f – extremity<br />
-is<br />
-es<br />
parisyllabic<br />
-is<br />
-is<br />
naris, naris f – nostril<br />
fames, famis f – hunger<br />
-is<br />
(imparisyllabic)<br />
-idis<br />
-it-idis<br />
cuspis, cuspidis f – cusp<br />
gastritis, gastritidis f – gastritis<br />
-us<br />
-ūdis<br />
-ūtis<br />
incus, incūdis f – incus<br />
salus, salūtis f – health<br />
6
-s (with previous<br />
consonant)<br />
-tis<br />
frons, frontis f – forehead<br />
pars, partis f – part<br />
-ax<br />
-ix<br />
-ox<br />
-ux<br />
-nx<br />
-acis<br />
-īcis<br />
-ocis<br />
-ucis<br />
-ngis<br />
pax, pacis f – peace<br />
radix, radīcis f – root<br />
vox, vocis f – voice<br />
nux, nucis f – nut<br />
phalanx, phalangis f – phalanx, phalange<br />
<strong>The</strong> exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> feminine gender<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns below are the exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> feminine gender, they<br />
belong to masculine or neuter genders.<br />
<strong>The</strong> masculine gender:<br />
atlas, antis m – atlas<br />
axis, is m – axis<br />
canalis, is m – channel<br />
pulvis, ĕris m – powder<br />
sanguis, inis m – blood<br />
dens, dentis m – tooth<br />
thorax, ācis m – thorax<br />
larynx, yngis m – larynx<br />
pharynx, yngis m – pharynx<br />
coccyx, ÿgis m – coccyx<br />
tendo, ĭnis m – tendon<br />
margo, ĭnis m – margin<br />
7
<strong>The</strong> neuter gender<br />
pancreas, ătis n – pancreas<br />
vas, vasis n – vessel<br />
<strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension<br />
-io – means some action or the action result, e. g.: injectio, onis f – injection;<br />
auscultatio, onis f – auscultation;<br />
-īt-is – points to the inflammation. <strong>The</strong> terms are formed by adding the suffix -it-<br />
(with the ending -is) to the stem <strong>of</strong> the noun naming some organ, e. g.:<br />
encephălon, i n – encephalitis, itĭdis f;<br />
pancreas, ătis n – pancreatitis, itĭdis f;<br />
gaster, tris f – gastritis, itĭdis f;<br />
-ōs-is – points to the disease without inflammation, e. g.:<br />
mycosis, is f – mycosis;<br />
stenosis, is f – stenosis;<br />
sclerosis, is f – sclerosis;<br />
-iās-is – also means the disease without inflammation, e. g.:<br />
cholelithiāsis, is f – cholelithiasis;<br />
elephantiāsis, is f – elephantiasis.<br />
<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents<br />
<strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension feminine nouns<br />
Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />
8
articulatio, onis f<br />
auris, is f<br />
cartilago, ĭnis f<br />
cutis, is f<br />
pelvis renalis<br />
arthrotchondrdermat-,<br />
dermpyel-<br />
joint, articulation<br />
ear<br />
cartilage<br />
skin<br />
calix (<strong>of</strong> the kidney)<br />
Exceptions<br />
dens, dentis m<br />
sanguis, ĭnis m<br />
tendo, ĭnis m<br />
vas, vasis n<br />
odonthaemat-,<br />
haemtenangi-<br />
tooth<br />
blood<br />
tendon<br />
vessel<br />
Word terminations<br />
– geněsis<br />
– lўsis<br />
– paresis<br />
– poësis<br />
– ptosis<br />
– rrhexis<br />
– sclerosis<br />
– stasis<br />
– stenosis<br />
– mycosis<br />
– necrosis<br />
origin, appearance<br />
disintegration, destruction, release from scars<br />
paresis, partial paralysis<br />
formation, secretion<br />
prolapse <strong>of</strong> an organ<br />
break<br />
induration, callosity<br />
stagnation<br />
narrowing<br />
fungoid disease<br />
necrosis, mortification<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
9
Task № 1.<br />
Form Gen. sing. and determine the stem <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension feminine<br />
nouns:<br />
sectio, cavitas, cutis (parisyllabic),<br />
(parisyllabic), phalanx, incus, hirudo, mucilago.<br />
solutio, salus, radix, pars, basis<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Translate the terms into English, determine the noun gender by the adjective<br />
endings:<br />
hydrops cardiacus, margo mastoideus, pancreas accessorium, vas capillare,<br />
operatio chirurgica, canalis incisivus, articulatio composita, cutis sicca.<br />
Task № 3.<br />
Form the terms <strong>of</strong> the given terms-elements:<br />
I. 1) odont(o) – (-algia, -rrhagia, -ectomia, -necrosis, -genes, -lithus);<br />
2) angi(o) – (-spasmus, -sclerosis, -paresis, -pathia, -necrosis, -tomia).<br />
II. 1) -sclerosis (arthr-, angi-, chondr-, ten-, pyel-);<br />
2) -mycosis (haemat-, stomat-, enter-, bronch-, colp-).<br />
Task № 4.<br />
Analyze the terms, determine the suffix and its meaning:<br />
cardiosclerosis, encephalitis, leucocytosis, hepatitis, nephritis, acidosis,<br />
chondrosis, duodenitis, stomatitis, arthrosis.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
10
Test № 1.<br />
Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
1) vas, vasis; 2) tuberositas, atis; 3) dens, dentis; 4) palpatio, onis; 5) tussis,<br />
is; 6) larynx, ngis; 7) pancreas, atis; 8) atlas, antis; 9) margo, inis; 10) bilis, is; 11)<br />
cartilago, inis; 12) phalanx, ngis.<br />
a) masculinum; b) femininum; c)<br />
neutrum.<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Agree the adjective with the noun:<br />
1) injection a) subcutaneus, b) subcutanea, c) subutaneum;<br />
2) vas a) lymphaticus, b) lymphatica, c) lymphaticum;<br />
3) sanguis a) venosus, b) venosa, c) venosum.<br />
Test № 3.<br />
Find the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms:<br />
1) odontogenesis a) inflammation <strong>of</strong> the skin<br />
2) arthrectomia b) disease <strong>of</strong> the joints<br />
3) tenorrhaphia c) spasm <strong>of</strong> the vessel<br />
4) dermatitis d) formation <strong>of</strong> the blood<br />
5) arthropathia e) destruction <strong>of</strong> the cartilage<br />
6) haematopoësis f) hardening <strong>of</strong> the bone<br />
7) otoscopium g) excision <strong>of</strong> the joint<br />
8) chondrolysis h) instrument for examining <strong>of</strong><br />
the ear<br />
9) angiospasmus i) formation <strong>of</strong> the teeth<br />
10) osteosclerosis j) suture <strong>of</strong> the tendon<br />
11
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
12
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision<br />
<strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />
anatomic and histological terms”<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th<br />
declension nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the<br />
degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />
<strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the Greek<br />
nouns ending in “sis” and Latin nouns like<br />
“febris” and others. <strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> stable<br />
combinations.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> terms derived from Greek are widely used in anatomic, pharmaceutical<br />
and clinical terminologies. <strong>The</strong> considerable part <strong>of</strong> these terms has the ending “sis”<br />
(basis, dosis, narcosis, necrosis etc.) To know the case endings, peculiarities <strong>of</strong><br />
declining and agreement <strong>of</strong> adjectives with the Greek nouns ending in “sis” helps to<br />
the students to better master the structure <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
To know:<br />
- the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the Greek nouns ending in “sis”;<br />
- the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> deelining <strong>of</strong> the Latin nouns febris, tussis, pertussis,<br />
pelvis, sitis.<br />
To know how:<br />
- to agree adjectives with the Greek nouns ending in “sis”;<br />
- to use the Greek nouns ending in “sis” in anatomic terminology and in<br />
prescription –writing;<br />
- to translate the terms from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
3
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
1. Case.<br />
2. Declension.<br />
3. Stem.<br />
4. Parisyllabic nouns.<br />
5. Imparisyllabic nouns.<br />
Definition<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns having an equal number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />
Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
<strong>The</strong> nouns having a different number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />
Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1) What are the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the Greek nouns ending in –sis?<br />
2) What Latin nouns are declined like the Greek nouns ending in –sis?<br />
3) What are the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the Greek nouns with the ending –ma<br />
in Nom. sing. and –atis in Gen. sing.?<br />
4) What are the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the noun vas, vasis n?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Translate the terms into Latin:<br />
1) <strong>The</strong> tropic fever 2) <strong>The</strong> best prognosis 3) <strong>The</strong> worst prognosis 4) <strong>The</strong> large<br />
and small pelvis 5) <strong>The</strong> deep narcosis 6) <strong>The</strong> cirrhosis <strong>of</strong> the liver 7) <strong>The</strong> chronic<br />
dry cough 8) <strong>The</strong> dry necrosis<br />
4
2. Translate the terms into Latin:<br />
1) internal basis <strong>of</strong> the skull 2) diaphragm <strong>of</strong> the mouth 3) pubic symphysis 4)<br />
nervous system 5) emphysema <strong>of</strong> lungs 6) cutaneous edema.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic`s contents:<br />
Graph № 1<br />
<strong>The</strong> feminine nouns <strong>of</strong><br />
Greek origin ending in<br />
–sis<br />
<strong>The</strong> case endings<br />
Singularis<br />
Nom. -sis<br />
Gen. -is<br />
Dat. -i<br />
Acc. -im<br />
Abl. -i<br />
Pluralis<br />
Nom. -es<br />
Gen. -ium<br />
Dat. -ibus<br />
Acc. -es<br />
Abl. -ibus<br />
Graph № 2<br />
<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> declining<br />
dosis, is f (dose)<br />
Nom.<br />
dosis<br />
Singularis<br />
doses<br />
Pluralis<br />
5
Gen.<br />
Dat.<br />
Acc.<br />
Abl.<br />
dosis<br />
dosi<br />
dosim<br />
dosi<br />
dosium<br />
dosibus<br />
doses<br />
dosibus<br />
Some Latin nouns are declined like these nouns <strong>of</strong> Greek origin, e.g.:<br />
febris, is f – fever<br />
pelvis, is f – pelvis<br />
tussis, is f – cough<br />
pertussis, is f – whooping cough<br />
sitis, is f – thirst<br />
Graph № 2<br />
<strong>The</strong> neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> Greek origin ending in-ma<br />
Nom.<br />
Gen.<br />
Dat.<br />
Acc.<br />
Abl.<br />
<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> declining<br />
trauma, atis n (trauma)<br />
Singularis Pluralis<br />
trauma traumata<br />
traumatis traumatum<br />
traumati traumatis<br />
trauma traumata<br />
traumatis traumatis<br />
Nom.<br />
Gen.<br />
<strong>The</strong> noun vas, vasis n (vessel)<br />
Singularis Pluralis<br />
vas<br />
vasa<br />
vasis<br />
vasorum<br />
Graph № 3<br />
6
Dat.<br />
Acc.<br />
Abl.<br />
vasi<br />
vas<br />
vase<br />
vasis<br />
vasa<br />
vasis<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Translate and decline the word combinations:<br />
average dose; lymphatic vessel; large edema<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Agree the adjectives with the nouns and translate the terms into English;<br />
1) dosis, is f (maximus, a, um; minimus, a, um; letalis, e; toxicus, a, um);<br />
2) tussis, is f (humidus, a, um; siccus, a, um; chronicus, a, um);<br />
3) prognosis, is f (bonus, a, um; malus, a, um; optimus, a, um).<br />
Task № 3.<br />
Translate the terms into English:<br />
diaphragma pelvis; basis cranii externa; anastomosis venosa; asthma<br />
bronchiale; necrosis hepatis toxica.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Determine the case <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
1) dosim; 2) basi; 3) tussis; 4) narcosi; 5) diagnoses; 6) pelvim; 7) prognosis;<br />
8) dosium; 9) phasis; 10) febres<br />
a) Nom.sing.; b) Nom.plur.; c) Gen.sing.; d) Gen.plur.; e) Acc.sing.; b)<br />
Dat.sing.; g) Abl.sing.<br />
Test № 2<br />
7
Find the correctly agreed terms:<br />
1) dosis media; 2) tussis ticcus; 3) rhizoma magna; 4) vas lymphaticus;<br />
5) prognosis bona; 6) basis externum; 7) pelvis major et minus; 8) diagnosis optima<br />
pr<strong>of</strong>undus; 10) vas sanguiferum.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
8
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histological terms”<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th declension<br />
nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />
comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />
<strong>The</strong> third declension adjectives. <strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong><br />
stable combinations. <strong>The</strong> agreement with the nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />
1-st, 2-nd, 3-rd declensions. <strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> present<br />
participles. <strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> use in the anatomic<br />
terminology. <strong>The</strong> degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives in<br />
the medical terminology.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> most <strong>of</strong> medical terms are the agreed attributes by their syntactical<br />
structure. Mastering <strong>of</strong> the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> adjectives and present<br />
participles, the degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the lexical minimum allows to<br />
develop and consolidate the practical habits <strong>of</strong> construction and translation <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terms.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know the division <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension adjectives into 3 subgroups<br />
depending on the number <strong>of</strong> gender endings.<br />
2. To know the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd group adjectives.<br />
3. To know the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />
4. To know the rule <strong>of</strong> forming the present participles.<br />
5. To know how to decline the 2-nd group adjectives.<br />
6. To know how to agree the 3-rd declension adjectives with the nouns <strong>of</strong> the 1-<br />
st, 2-nd and 3-rd declensions.<br />
7. To know how to form the comparative and superlative degrees <strong>of</strong><br />
comparison.<br />
8. To know how to form two- and many-word anatomic terms on the base <strong>of</strong><br />
new lexical material.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an<br />
adjective, the description <strong>of</strong> declensions,<br />
the determination <strong>of</strong> the adjective stem,<br />
the degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />
3
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />
2. Stem<br />
3. Present participle<br />
4. Comparison <strong>of</strong><br />
adjectives<br />
<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />
and number.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part <strong>of</strong> an adjective left after removing the<br />
inflection <strong>of</strong> the feminine gender.<br />
Formed by adding the ending –ns to the stems <strong>of</strong> the<br />
1-st and 2-nd conjugation verbs and the ending –ens<br />
to the stems <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd and 4-th conjugation verbs.<br />
<strong>The</strong> positive degree (gradus positivus), the<br />
comparative degree (gradus comparativus), the<br />
superlative degree (gradus superlativus).<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. How many groups <strong>of</strong> adjectives are there in Latin?<br />
2. What adjectives belong to the 2-nd group?<br />
3. How is the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives determined?<br />
4. How are the 3-rd declension adjectives declined?<br />
5. How are the present participles formed?<br />
6. How are the comparative and superlative degrees <strong>of</strong> adjectives formed?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Translate the terms into English:<br />
1) Musculus biceps femoris. 2) Arteriae nasales posteriores laterales. 3)<br />
Canalis centralis medullae spinalis. 4) Arteriae gastricae breves. 5) Systema<br />
4
nervosum centrale. 6) Pars basilaris ossis ethmoidalis. 7) Ligamentum teres femoris.<br />
8) Venae pulmonales sinistrse. 9) Morbus insanabilis. 10) Injectio intramuscularis.<br />
2. Translate the terms into Latin:<br />
1) Oval foramen. 2) Clavicular incisure <strong>of</strong> the chest bone. 3) Capillary vessel.<br />
4) Bronchial asthma. 5) <strong>The</strong> basic part <strong>of</strong> the occipital bone. 6) <strong>The</strong> facial nerve.<br />
7) <strong>The</strong> s<strong>of</strong>t ulcer. 8) <strong>The</strong> frontal region. 9) <strong>The</strong> nasal bone. 10) <strong>The</strong> alveolar<br />
channel.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> structurological plan.<br />
Graph № 1<br />
<strong>The</strong> 3-rd declension adjectives<br />
3 gender endings<br />
m f n<br />
-er -is -e<br />
celer, eris, ere<br />
acer, acris, acre<br />
saluber, bris, bre<br />
2 gender endings<br />
m f n<br />
-is -e<br />
frontalis, e<br />
dentalis, e<br />
articularis, e<br />
1 endings for all genders<br />
m f n<br />
Nom. sing. Gen. sing.<br />
par, paris<br />
recens, ntis<br />
Graph № 2<br />
<strong>The</strong> case endings <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension<br />
adjectives (the vowel type)<br />
5
Singularis<br />
Nom. different<br />
Gen.<br />
–is<br />
Dat. –i<br />
Acc em (m f) Nom (n)<br />
Pluralis<br />
Nom. –es (m, f) –ia (n)<br />
Gen –ium<br />
Dat. –ibus<br />
Acc es (m f) ia (n)<br />
Graph № 3<br />
<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension adjectives with the 1-st, 2-nd and 3-rd<br />
declension nouns.<br />
Pattern 1<br />
aqua, ae f<br />
remedium, i n<br />
saluber, bris, bre<br />
aër, aëris m<br />
Pattern 2<br />
os, ossis n<br />
crista, ae f<br />
sacralis, e<br />
musculus, i m<br />
Pattern 3<br />
tinctura, ae f<br />
6
sirupus, i m<br />
simplex, icis<br />
pulvis, eris m<br />
Graph № 4<br />
<strong>The</strong> Present partisiples<br />
<strong>The</strong> 1-st and 2-nd conjugation<br />
werbs<br />
<strong>The</strong> 3-rd and 4-th conjugation<br />
werbs<br />
the Present stem<br />
the ending -ns<br />
the ending -ens<br />
Gen. sing. -ntis<br />
Graph № 5<br />
<strong>The</strong> formation <strong>of</strong> the comparative degree <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />
7
E. g. Positivus Stem Comparativus<br />
long<br />
longus, a um<br />
long-<br />
longior (m, f), longius (n)<br />
red<br />
ruber, bra, brum<br />
rubr-<br />
rubrior (m, f), rubrius (n)<br />
healthy<br />
saluber, bris, bre<br />
salubr-<br />
salubrior (m, f), salubrius (n)<br />
short<br />
brevis, e<br />
brev-<br />
brevior (m, f), brevius (n)<br />
simple<br />
simplex, icis<br />
simplic-<br />
simplicior (m, f), simplicius (n)<br />
Graph № 6<br />
<strong>The</strong> formation <strong>of</strong> the superlative degree <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />
E. g. Positivus Stem Superlativus<br />
long<br />
longus, a um<br />
long-<br />
longissimus, a, um<br />
short<br />
brevis, e<br />
brev-<br />
brevissimus, a, um<br />
simple<br />
simplex, icis<br />
simplic-<br />
simplissimus, a, um<br />
red<br />
ruber, bra, brum<br />
rubr-<br />
ruberrimus, a, um<br />
healthy<br />
saluber, bris, bre<br />
salubr-<br />
saluberrimus, a, um<br />
similar<br />
similis, e<br />
simil-<br />
simillimus, a, um<br />
dissimilar<br />
dissimilis, e<br />
dissimil-<br />
disimillimus, a, um<br />
facile<br />
facilis, e<br />
facil-<br />
facillimus, a, um<br />
difficult<br />
difficilis, e<br />
difficil-<br />
difficillimus, a, um<br />
graceful<br />
gracilis, e<br />
gracil-<br />
gracillimus, a, um<br />
humil<br />
humilis, e<br />
humil-<br />
humillimus, a, um<br />
8
Graph № 7<br />
Irregular comparisons<br />
Positivus Comparativus Superlativus<br />
bonus, a, um (good)<br />
malus, a, um (bad)<br />
magnus, a, um (big)<br />
parvus, a, um (small)<br />
multus, a, um (many)<br />
melior, ius (better)<br />
peior, ius (worse)<br />
maior, ius (bigger)<br />
minor, us (smaller)<br />
plus, pluris (more)<br />
optimus, a, um (the best)<br />
pessimus, a, um (the worst)<br />
maximus, a, um (the biggest)<br />
minimus, a, um (the smallest)<br />
plurimus, a, um (the most)<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Form the comparative and superlative degrees <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />
1) latus, a, um (wide); 2) dulcis, e (sweet); 3) celer, ĕris, ĕre (fast); 4) liber,<br />
era, erum (free); 5) utilus, e (useful); 6) niger, gra, grum (black); 7) sapiens, ntis<br />
(clever); 8) mollis, e (s<strong>of</strong>t); 9) longus, a, um (long); 10) recens, ntis (fresh),<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Agree the 3-rd declension adjectives with the 1-st, 2-nd and 3-rd declension<br />
nouns, translate the terms:<br />
1) sacralis, e (foramen, canal, crest);<br />
9
2) recens, ntis (milk, air, flower, decoction);<br />
3) renalis, e (vein, pelvis);<br />
4) centralis, e (artery, sulcus, vessel);<br />
5) abdominalis, e (cavity, aorta, region);<br />
6) saluber, bris, bre (ointment, juice, air, plant);<br />
7) lacrimalis, e (incisure, bone, part).<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Determine the group <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />
1) sacralis, e; 2) recens, ntis; 3) acutus, a, um; 4) latus, a, um; 5) niger, gra,<br />
grum; 6) alveolaris, e; 7) saluber, bris, bre; 8) lateralis, e; 9) simplex, icis; 10) acer,<br />
acris, acre; 11) dentalis, e; 12) asper, era, erum.<br />
a) 1-st group; b) 2-nd group.<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Choose the correct variant <strong>of</strong> agreement:<br />
1) cartilago, inis f<br />
2) processus, us m a) articularis<br />
3) discus, i m<br />
4) facies, ei f b) articulare<br />
5) concha, ae f<br />
6) ligamentum, i n<br />
Test № 3<br />
Find the correctly agreed terms:<br />
10
1) foramen sacralis; 2) articulatio simplicis; 3) sulcus lacrimale; 4) ossa<br />
frontalia; 5) exitus letalis; 6) sinus renale; 7) herba saluber; 8) aёr recentis; 9) arteria<br />
centralis; 10) arcus dentale.<br />
Test № 4<br />
Find the corresponding translation <strong>of</strong> the Latin terms:<br />
1. Ramus perforans a) permanent teeth<br />
2. Costae fluctuantes b) corrective remedy<br />
3. Dentes permanentes c) returning typhus<br />
4. Pulvis laxans d) afferent vessels<br />
5. Aorta descendens e) perforating branch<br />
6. Remedium corrigens f) adjuvant remedy<br />
7. Typhus recurrents g) floating ribs<br />
8. Nervus perforans h) descending aorta<br />
9. Remedium adjuvans i) laxative powder<br />
10. Vasa afferentia j) perforating nerve<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
11
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №1<br />
Content module №3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision<br />
<strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />
anatomic and histological terms”<br />
<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th<br />
declension nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the<br />
degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />
<strong>The</strong> learning <strong>of</strong> the fourth and fifth<br />
declension nouns. <strong>The</strong> exceptions. <strong>The</strong><br />
vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> stable combinations. <strong>The</strong> current<br />
test control <strong>of</strong> the module.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> great number <strong>of</strong> medical terms are the 4 th and 5 th declension nouns<br />
(sinus, processus, genu, abscessus, facies, caries, species etc.) Mastering <strong>of</strong> the<br />
lexical minimum. case endings, the most important exceptions to the rules <strong>of</strong> gender<br />
promotes the replenishment <strong>of</strong> the vocabulary, broadens the grammatical habits <strong>of</strong><br />
students.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the 4 th and 5 th declension nouns and the most<br />
important exceptions to the rules <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />
2. To know how to decline the 4 th and 5 th declension nouns.<br />
3. To know how to agree the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the 1 st and 2 nd groups with the 4 th<br />
and 5 th declension nouns.<br />
4. To know how to form two- and many-word medical terms on the base <strong>of</strong><br />
new lexical material.<br />
5. To know how to translate the terms from Latin into English and on the<br />
contrary.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Russian language.<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
3
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
1. Case.<br />
2. Declension.<br />
3. Stem.<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1) What nouns belong to the 4 th declension? Give examples.<br />
2) Name the case endings <strong>of</strong> the 4 th declension nouns.<br />
3) Name the exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender <strong>of</strong> the 4 th declension nouns.<br />
4) What nouns belong to the 5 th declension? Give examples.<br />
5) Name the case endings <strong>of</strong> the 5 th declension nouns.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Translate the terms into English:<br />
1) plexus venosus foraminis ovalis;<br />
2) genu dextrum and sinistrum;<br />
3) habitus bonus aegroti;<br />
4) articulatio genus;<br />
5) dies criticus morbi;<br />
6) cornu anterius et posterius;<br />
7) facies Hippocratica;<br />
4
8) facies articularis;<br />
9) caries dentium;<br />
10) usus internus.<br />
2. Translate the terms into Latin:<br />
Arch <strong>of</strong> the aorta; 2) dislocation <strong>of</strong> the knee; 3) the acute period <strong>of</strong> the insult;<br />
4) the left hepatic duct; 5) cartilage <strong>of</strong> the acoustic meatus; 6) fingers <strong>of</strong> the right<br />
hand; 7) palmar venous arch; 8) the present <strong>state</strong> <strong>of</strong> the patient; 9) internal use,<br />
external use; 10) frontal sinus.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic`s contents:<br />
Graph № 1.<br />
Declension 4<br />
Typical signs Case endings Examples<br />
Nom.sing.<br />
-us (m)<br />
-u (n)<br />
Singularis<br />
m n<br />
Nom. –us -u<br />
Gen. –us -us<br />
Dat. –ui -u<br />
Acc. – um -u<br />
Abl. –u -u<br />
arcus, us m<br />
processus, us m<br />
genu, us n<br />
cornu, us n<br />
Gen. sing.<br />
Pluralis<br />
Exceptions<br />
-us (m, n)<br />
m<br />
n<br />
manus, us f<br />
5
Nom. –us -ua<br />
Gen. –uum -uum<br />
Dat. –ibus –ibus<br />
Acc. –us -ua<br />
Abl. –ibus -ibus<br />
acus, us f<br />
quercus, us f<br />
pinus, us f<br />
Casus<br />
Nom.<br />
Gen.<br />
Dat.<br />
Acc.<br />
Abl.<br />
Graph № 2.<br />
<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the 4 th declension nouns<br />
sinus, us m – sinus genu, us n - knee<br />
sin- -stem gen- -stem<br />
Singularis<br />
Pluralis<br />
m<br />
n m n<br />
sinus genu sinus genua<br />
sinus genus sinuum genuum<br />
sinui genu sinibus genibus<br />
sinum genu sinus genua<br />
sinu genu sinibus genibus<br />
Graph № 3.<br />
<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the 1 st and 2 nd groups<br />
with the 4 th declension nouns.<br />
1) sinus, us m –sinus frontalis, e -frontal<br />
signoideus, a, um – sigmoid<br />
sacralis, e – sacral<br />
2) cornu, us n – horn coccygeus, a, um – coccygeal<br />
sacralis, e – sacral<br />
3) manus, us f – hand dexter, tra, trum – right<br />
sinister, tra, trum – left<br />
6
suffix<br />
-t -us<br />
-s -us<br />
-x -us<br />
Graph № 4<br />
<strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 4 th declension nouns<br />
Examples<br />
ductus, us m – (from duco, duxi, ductum, ere – to lead, to conduct)<br />
visus, us m – sight (from video, vidi, visum, ere – to look)<br />
plexus, us m –<br />
Declinatio 5<br />
Graph № 5<br />
Typical signs Case endings Examples<br />
Nom.sing.<br />
-es (f)<br />
Gen.sing.<br />
-ei<br />
Sing. Plur.<br />
Nom. –es -es<br />
Gen. – ei -erum<br />
Dat. – ei -ebus<br />
Acc. – em -es<br />
Abl. –e -ebus<br />
caries, ei f<br />
facies, ei f<br />
rabies, ei f<br />
scabies, ei f<br />
Exceptions<br />
meridies, ei m – south<br />
dies, ei m – day<br />
(in medical<br />
terminology)<br />
Casus<br />
Nom.<br />
Gen.<br />
Graph № 6<br />
<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the 5 th declension nouns<br />
facies, ei f – surfacc (stem faci); dies, ei m – day (stem di-<br />
Singularis<br />
Pluralis<br />
facies dies facies dies<br />
faciei diei facierum dierum<br />
7
Dat.<br />
faciei<br />
diei<br />
faciebus<br />
diebus<br />
Acc.<br />
faciem<br />
diem<br />
facies<br />
dies<br />
Abl.<br />
facie<br />
die<br />
facebus<br />
diebus<br />
Graph № 7<br />
<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> adjectives with the 5 th declension nouns<br />
1) facies, ei f – surface internus, a, um – internal<br />
dorsalis, e – dorsal<br />
2) caries, ei f – caries chronicus, a, um – chronic<br />
complicates, a, um – complicated<br />
3) dies, ei m – day criticus, a, um – critical<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Decline the terms:<br />
1) arcus zygomaticus (zygomatic arch)<br />
2) cornu sacrale (sacral horn)<br />
3) caries pr<strong>of</strong>unda (deep caries)<br />
4) manus dextra (right hand)<br />
Task № 2<br />
Agree the adjectives with the 4 th and 5 th declension nouns:<br />
1) cornu, us n – horn<br />
2) arcus, us m – arch<br />
3) plexus, us m – plexus<br />
coccygeus, a, um – cocygeal<br />
dentalis, e – dental<br />
cervicalis, e – cervical<br />
8
4) dies, ei m – day<br />
criticus, a, um - critical<br />
5) facies, ei f – surface<br />
anterior, ius – anterior<br />
6) caries, ei f – caries<br />
pr<strong>of</strong>undus, a, um – deep<br />
7) visus, us m – sight<br />
bonus, a, um – good<br />
8) processus, us m – process spinosus, a, um – spinous<br />
9) sinus, us m – sinus<br />
frontalis, e – frontal<br />
10)exitus, us m – exit<br />
letalis, e – lethal<br />
Task № 3<br />
Put the terms in Gen.sing. and Nom.plur.<br />
1) spiritus aethylicus – ethylic spirit<br />
2) manus sinistra – left hand<br />
3) cornu coccygeum – coccygeal horn<br />
4) genu dextrum – right knee<br />
5) sinus sigmoideus – sigmoid sinus<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
1) processus, us . . .; 2) facies, ei . . .; 3) arcus, us . . .; 4) Quercus, us . . .; 5)<br />
meridies, ei . . .; 6) scabies, ei . . .; 7) pulsus, us . . .; 8) caries, ei . . .; 9)<br />
abscessus, us . . .; 10) manus, us . . .; 11) exitus, us . . .; 12) genu, us . . .; 13)<br />
habitus, us . . .; 14) cornu, us . . .; 15) sinus, us . .<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />
a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum<br />
Test № 2<br />
Determine the case <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
1) ductuum; 2) genua; 3) spiritus; 4) cornua; 5) cariei; 6) diem; 7) rerum; 8)<br />
processus; 9) Quercus; 10) genus<br />
9
Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />
a) Nom.sing; b) Nom.plur; c) Gen.sing; d) Gen.plur; e) Acc.sing.;<br />
f) Acc.plur.<br />
Test № 3<br />
Find the terms agreed in a wrong way:<br />
a) cornu anterius et posterius;<br />
b) manus dextra;<br />
c) habitus bonum;<br />
d) sinus frontalis;<br />
e) cornu coccygeus;<br />
f) caries chronicus;<br />
g) genu dexter et sinister;<br />
h) spiritus aethylicus;<br />
i) plexus venosis;<br />
j) exitus letale;<br />
k) usus internus;<br />
l) facies Hippocratica<br />
Test № 4<br />
Choose the corresponding variant <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the Latin terms:<br />
1) arcus costalis<br />
a) Hippocrate’s face<br />
2) cornu dextrum et sinistrum b) alveolar process<br />
3) plexus nervosus<br />
c) bones <strong>of</strong> the face<br />
4) processus alveolaris<br />
d) caries <strong>of</strong> the tooth<br />
5) abscessus linguae<br />
e) sigmoid sinus<br />
6) sinus sigmoideus<br />
f) abscess <strong>of</strong> the tongue<br />
7) facies Hippocratica<br />
g) critical day<br />
8) ossa faciei<br />
h) right and left horn<br />
9) caries dentis<br />
i) costal arch<br />
10)dies criticus<br />
j) nervous plexus<br />
10
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
11
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 1<br />
Content modules №№ 1-3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />
and histological terms”<br />
1. Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />
histological terms.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives<br />
<strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declensions as the way <strong>of</strong><br />
building <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms.<br />
3. <strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th<br />
declension nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the<br />
degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />
<strong>The</strong> summary module control.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2007<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> practical habits on the discipline “Latin language and medical<br />
terminology” includes the free reading <strong>of</strong> the Latin text, using <strong>of</strong> the alphabet in the<br />
work with the dictionary, the correct writing <strong>of</strong> the sounds <strong>of</strong> the Latin alphabet; the<br />
practical use <strong>of</strong> the Greek letter combinations in the words derived from Greek; free<br />
mastering <strong>of</strong> the lexical material, the skill to classify the words by cases with the<br />
purpose <strong>of</strong> correct writing <strong>of</strong> endings, free making up <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological<br />
terms on the base <strong>of</strong> the acquired grammatical knowledge. <strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
“<strong>The</strong> summary test <strong>of</strong> the 1-st term” is in the checking <strong>of</strong> the quality <strong>of</strong> the<br />
knowledge, skills and habits acquired by students.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know the Latin alphabet, the classification <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants,<br />
diphthongs, letter combinations, long and short syllables, the rules <strong>of</strong> stress.<br />
2. To know the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing nouns in<br />
the vocabulary, the determination <strong>of</strong> the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong><br />
nouns.<br />
3. To know the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the adjectives, division into groups,<br />
gender endings, the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem, the rules <strong>of</strong> forming the degrees<br />
<strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />
4. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> constructing and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
constructions “the agreed attribute”, morphological and syntactical structure<br />
<strong>of</strong> two- and many-word terms with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes.<br />
5. To know the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the nouns <strong>of</strong> all declensions, the paradigm, the<br />
peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />
6. To know the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the nouns <strong>of</strong> all declensions, the 1-st<br />
and 2-nd group adjectives, the word terminations.<br />
7. To know how to determine the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong> nouns and<br />
adjectives, to write them in the vocabulary form.<br />
3
8. To know how to agree adjectives with nouns, to form two- and many-word<br />
anatomic terms.<br />
9. To know how to translate the terms from Latin into English and on the<br />
contrary.<br />
10. To know how to form the clinical terms <strong>of</strong> separate terms-elements, to<br />
translate them from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
English language<br />
Russian language, English language<br />
Russian language<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
To know how to write the letters <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin alphabet, to differentiate letters<br />
and sounds, diphthongs and<br />
monophthongs.<br />
Words in English and Russian are<br />
pronounced with extra emphasis on one<br />
syllable, which is called “stress”.<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />
nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />
in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms. <strong>The</strong><br />
grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an adjective,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the adjective stem, the<br />
rules <strong>of</strong> forming the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />
comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the formation<br />
<strong>of</strong> the past and present participles.<br />
4
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Alphabet<br />
Diphthong<br />
Phoneme<br />
Phonetics<br />
Stress<br />
Penult<br />
Antepenult<br />
Term<br />
Gender<br />
Number<br />
Case<br />
Declension<br />
Stem<br />
Definition<br />
<strong>The</strong> graphic signs – letters arranged in the certain<br />
order.<br />
A combination <strong>of</strong> two vowels which are pronounced<br />
as one sound or one syllable.<br />
<strong>The</strong> minimum speech unit which is singled out <strong>of</strong> the<br />
continuous speech stream.<br />
<strong>The</strong> sound structure <strong>of</strong> the language; the branch <strong>of</strong><br />
linguistics which studies the sound structure <strong>of</strong> the<br />
language.<br />
Stress is an extra emphasis on one syllable in the<br />
words.<br />
Penult is the next to last syllable.<br />
Antepenult is the syllable before the penult.<br />
A term is a word or a word-combination which is a<br />
name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong><br />
science, production or arts.<br />
Masculine – genus masculinum (m); feminine –<br />
genus femininum (f); neuter – genus neutrum (n).<br />
When a noun names one thing, we say it in singular,<br />
when it names more than one thing, we say it in<br />
plural.<br />
A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />
whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />
verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />
5
<strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />
so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />
called “cases”.<br />
A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />
declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />
<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />
removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />
<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />
and number.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants, diphthongs, letter<br />
combinations.<br />
2. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> stress, long and short syllables.<br />
3. Name the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing nouns in<br />
the vocabulary, the determination <strong>of</strong> the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong><br />
nouns.<br />
4. Name the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the adjectives, division into groups,<br />
gender endings, the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem, the rules <strong>of</strong> forming the degrees<br />
<strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />
5. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> constructing and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
constructions “the agreed attribute”, morphological and syntactical structure<br />
<strong>of</strong> two- and many-word terms with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes.<br />
6. Name the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the nouns <strong>of</strong> all declensions, the paradigm, the<br />
peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />
7. Name the prepositions used with Acc. and Abl., the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> using the<br />
prepositions in and sub. Give the example.<br />
8. Name the morphological signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd group adjectives, the past<br />
and present participles, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing them in the vocabulary form.<br />
9. Name the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the nouns <strong>of</strong> all declensions, the 1-st and<br />
2-nd group adjectives, the word terminations.<br />
6
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Test tasks for module control on the discipline “Latin language and medical<br />
terminology”<br />
(Module 1. Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the<br />
topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms”)<br />
Task 1 (8 points).<br />
Choose the right pronunciation variant <strong>of</strong> the consonant c:<br />
1) acidum; 2) cervicalis; 3) cranium; 4) clavicula; 5) occiput; 6) cyanosis; 7)<br />
caecus; 8) pancreas.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers: a) [ ts ]<br />
b) [ k ]<br />
c) [ ts ], [ k ]<br />
d) [ k ], [ ts ]<br />
Task 2 (8 points).<br />
Choose the right pronunciation variant <strong>of</strong> the consonant s:<br />
1) fissura; 2) extensor; 3) nasalis; 4) accessorius; 5) incisura; 6) dorsalis; 7)<br />
usus; 8) transfusio.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers: a) [ s ]<br />
b) [ z ]<br />
Task 3 (8 points).<br />
Determine what syllable is stressed:<br />
1) palpebra; 2) dentatus; 3) felleus; 4) pilula; 5) fibrosus; 6) Belladonna;7)<br />
tibia; 8) fissura; 9) frigidus; 10) decoctum.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers: a) penult<br />
b) antepenult<br />
7
Task 4 (2 points).<br />
<strong>The</strong> declension <strong>of</strong> nouns is determined by the ending <strong>of</strong>:<br />
a) Nom. sing.;<br />
b) Gen. sing.;<br />
c) Nom. plur.;<br />
d) Gen. plur.<br />
Task 5 (2 points).<br />
<strong>The</strong> gender <strong>of</strong> nouns is determined by the ending <strong>of</strong>:<br />
a) Nom. sing.;<br />
b) Gen. sing.;<br />
c) Nom. plur.;<br />
d) Gen. plur.<br />
Task 6 (2 points).<br />
<strong>The</strong> stem <strong>of</strong> a noun is found by dropping the ending <strong>of</strong>:<br />
a) Nom. sing.;<br />
b) Gen. sing.;<br />
c) Nom. plur.;<br />
d) Gen. plur.<br />
Task 7 (2 points).<br />
Latin adjectives are divided info:<br />
a) 2 groups;<br />
b) 3 groups;<br />
c) 4 groups;<br />
d) are not divided into groups.<br />
Task 8 (8 points).<br />
8
Determine the declension <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
1) abscessus, us m; 2) haema, atis n; 3) scabies, ei f; 4) sulcus, i m; 5)<br />
apertura, ae f; 6) canalis, is m; 7) diameter, tri f; 8) corpus, oris n.<br />
a) I b) II c) III d) IV e) V<br />
Task 9 (8 points).<br />
Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />
1) cornu, us … ; 2) facies, ei … ;<br />
3) dens, dentis … ; 4) caput, itis … ;<br />
5) ductus, us … ; 6) os, ossis … ;<br />
7) struma, ae … ; 8) musculus, i …<br />
a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum.<br />
Task 10 (8 points).<br />
Choose the second part <strong>of</strong> the term according to the meaning:<br />
1) pelvis … ; 2) cornu … ; 3) periodus … ; 4) tuberculum … ; 5) facies … ;<br />
6) columna …;<br />
7) processus … ; 8) pars … .<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
a) pharyngeus, a, um<br />
b) major, ius<br />
c) spinosus, a, um<br />
d) criticus, a, um<br />
e) basilaris, e<br />
f) vertebralis, e<br />
g) coccygeus, a, um<br />
h) articularis, e<br />
Task 11 (8 points).<br />
Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />
9
1) ovalis; 2) simplex; 3) sinistrum; 4) lata; 5) zygomaticus; 6) superior; 7)<br />
dexter; 8) frontale.<br />
a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum.<br />
Task 12 (8 points).<br />
Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />
1) os<br />
2) incisura a) lacrimalis<br />
3) canalis b) lacrimale<br />
4) sacculus<br />
Task 13 (8 points).<br />
Choose the numbers <strong>of</strong> the rightly agreed terms:<br />
1) os brevis; 2) foramen ovale; 3) ligamentum latus; 4) facies interna; 5)<br />
articulatio simplex; 6) musculus pr<strong>of</strong>undum; 7) cornu coccygeum; 8)<br />
incisura claviculare.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
10
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №2<br />
Content module №1<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the<br />
topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”<br />
<strong>The</strong> verb: the verb categories. <strong>The</strong><br />
imperative mood. <strong>The</strong> indicative mood <strong>of</strong> the<br />
present tense, active and passive voices. <strong>The</strong><br />
subjunctive mood in the prescription – writing: the<br />
verb fio, fiĕri. Attention to the translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
third person singular and plural <strong>of</strong> the passive<br />
voice. <strong>The</strong> stable prescription combinations.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> verb takes the important place in the system <strong>of</strong> medical terms.<br />
It is impossible to translate elementary sentences, to write and translate prescription<br />
without mastering the personal endings <strong>of</strong> active and passive voices, the principles<br />
<strong>of</strong> forming the imperative and subjunctive moods <strong>of</strong> verbs, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong><br />
translation etc.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know the basic categories <strong>of</strong> the verb.<br />
2. To know the basic ending <strong>of</strong> the active and passive voices.<br />
3. To know the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> Praesens indicativi activi et<br />
passivi.<br />
4. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> the 2 nd person singular and plural <strong>of</strong> the<br />
imperative mood.<br />
5. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> the subjunctive mood.<br />
6. To know how to find the stem and to determine the conjugation <strong>of</strong> verbs.<br />
7. To know how to form Singular and Plural imperative <strong>of</strong> verbs.<br />
8. To know how to form Praesens inducativi activi et passivi <strong>of</strong> verbs.<br />
9. To know how to translate the verb forms from Latin into English.<br />
10. To know how to use the verbs in the prescription forms.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
Russian language and English language<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a verb,<br />
3
the description <strong>of</strong> conjugations, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the verb stem, the<br />
imperative mood.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
1. Person<br />
2. Number<br />
3. Tense<br />
4. Mood<br />
5. Voice<br />
6. Conjugation<br />
Who is the subject, i. e., who performs the action,<br />
from the speaker’s point <strong>of</strong> view.<br />
How many subjects, singular or plural.<br />
<strong>The</strong> time <strong>of</strong> action; Latin has six tenses.<br />
<strong>The</strong> manner <strong>of</strong> indicating the action or <strong>state</strong> <strong>of</strong> being<br />
<strong>of</strong> the verb; like English, Latin has the indicative<br />
(which “indicates” facts), the imperative (which<br />
orders actions), and the subjunctive (which describes,<br />
in particular, hypothetical or potential actions).<br />
An indication, with transitive verbs (those that can<br />
take direct objects), <strong>of</strong> whether the subject performs<br />
the action (the active voice) or receives it (passive).<br />
Latin verbs are divided into four conjugations.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. List five characteristics <strong>of</strong> Latin verbs. Characterize each <strong>of</strong> them.<br />
2. How many conjugations are Latin verbs divided into?<br />
3. How is the conjugation determined?<br />
4
4. In what forms are Latin verbs written down into the vocabulary?<br />
5. What are the personal endings for the active voice?<br />
6. What are the personal endings for the passive voice?<br />
7. In what way are the personal endings added to the verb stems?<br />
8. How is the singular imperative formed?<br />
9. How is the plural imperative formed?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Determine the conjugation <strong>of</strong> the verbs: videre (to see); agitare (to shake<br />
up); scire (to know); dividere (to divide); tegere (to cover); curare (to<br />
treat); docere (to teach); repetere (to repeat); miscere (to mix); solvere<br />
(to dissolve).<br />
2. Find the stem <strong>of</strong> the verbs given in the task 1.<br />
3. Form Singular and Plural imperative <strong>of</strong> the verbs:<br />
agitare (to shake up) discere (to learn)<br />
vertere (to turn over) nutrire (to feed)<br />
addere (to add)<br />
docere (to teach)<br />
4. Translate into English:<br />
1. Solve tabulettam in aqua.<br />
2. Misce. Da. Signa.<br />
3. Da in tabulettis.<br />
4. Praepara tincturam.<br />
5. Studete linguam Latinam bene (well)!<br />
5. Translate into Latin:<br />
2. Be healthy.<br />
3. Sterilize the mixture.<br />
4. Give in gelatinous capsules.<br />
5. Prepare and divide the mass <strong>of</strong> the pills.<br />
6. Don`t injure!<br />
5
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic’s contents:<br />
Graph № 1.<br />
<strong>The</strong> verb (verbum)<br />
<strong>The</strong> verb categories<br />
Person<br />
Number<br />
Tense<br />
Mood<br />
Voice<br />
(persona)<br />
(numerus)<br />
(tempus)<br />
(modus)<br />
(vox)<br />
persona prima<br />
Singularis<br />
6 tenses<br />
Indicative<br />
Active<br />
(1 st person)<br />
Pluralis<br />
(only<br />
Imperative<br />
Passive<br />
persona<br />
Praesens is<br />
Subjunctive<br />
secunda<br />
learned)<br />
(2 nd person)<br />
persona tertia<br />
(3 rd person)<br />
Graph № 2.<br />
Conjugations<br />
<strong>The</strong> infinitive <strong>The</strong> stem <strong>The</strong> stem ending Conjugation<br />
signare – to designare<br />
studere – to study<br />
dividere – to divide<br />
diluere – to dissolve<br />
audire – to listen<br />
signa -<br />
stude -<br />
divid –<br />
dilu –<br />
audi –<br />
-a-<br />
-ethe<br />
consonant,<br />
rarely –u-<br />
-i-<br />
I<br />
II<br />
III<br />
IV<br />
6
N. B. To find the present stem, it is necessary to drop the –re from the<br />
infinitives <strong>of</strong> the 1 st , 2 nd and 4-th conjugations, and the -ere from the infinitives <strong>of</strong><br />
the 3 rd conjugation.<br />
Graph № 3.<br />
<strong>The</strong> vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> verbs<br />
<strong>The</strong> 1 st person<br />
<strong>The</strong> 1 st person<br />
<strong>The</strong> supine (the<br />
<strong>The</strong> present active<br />
sing.,<br />
present<br />
sing., past perfect<br />
verbal noun)<br />
infinitive<br />
active,<br />
indicative<br />
-i<br />
-um<br />
-re<br />
mood<br />
-o<br />
do<br />
dedi<br />
datum<br />
dare<br />
misceo<br />
miscui<br />
mextum<br />
miscere<br />
divido<br />
divisi<br />
divisum<br />
dividere<br />
constituo<br />
constitui<br />
constitutum<br />
constituere<br />
recipio<br />
recipi<br />
receptum<br />
recipere<br />
nutrio<br />
nutrivi<br />
nutritum<br />
nutrere<br />
forms.<br />
N. B. For medical students it is enough to know the first and the fourth verb<br />
Graph № 4.<br />
Imperative mood<br />
<strong>The</strong> singular imperative<br />
<strong>The</strong> plural imperative<br />
infinitive – -re te - I, II, IV<br />
conjugations<br />
Stem +<br />
ite - III<br />
conjugation<br />
7
Conjungation Infinitive Stem Singularis<br />
imperative<br />
Plural<br />
imperative<br />
first dare – to give da- da da-te<br />
second miscere – to mix misce- misce misce-te<br />
third dividere – to divide divid- divide divid-ite<br />
fourth audire – to listen audi- audi audi-te<br />
Graph № 5.<br />
<strong>The</strong> personal endings <strong>of</strong> the present indicative active and passive<br />
Person Active Passive<br />
Sing Plur Sing Plur<br />
1 st person<br />
2 nd person<br />
3 rd person<br />
-o<br />
-s<br />
-t<br />
-mus<br />
-tis<br />
-nt<br />
-or<br />
-ris<br />
-tur<br />
-mur<br />
-mini<br />
-ntur<br />
N. B. <strong>The</strong> personal endings are added to the present stem.<br />
Graph № 6.<br />
<strong>The</strong> verbs in prescription<br />
Infinitive Conjugation Imperative mood Subjunctive mood<br />
Recipere<br />
(to take)<br />
Miscere<br />
(to mix)<br />
Dare<br />
(to give)<br />
III<br />
II<br />
I<br />
Recipe (take)<br />
Misce (mix)<br />
Da (give)<br />
–––<br />
Misceatur/misceantur<br />
(let it be mixed let them<br />
be mixed)<br />
Detur (let it be given)<br />
Dentur (let them be<br />
given)<br />
8
Signare<br />
I<br />
Signa (mark)<br />
(to mark)<br />
Signetur (let it be<br />
Sterilisare<br />
I<br />
Sterilisa (sterilize)<br />
marked)<br />
(to sterilize)<br />
Solvere<br />
III<br />
Solve (solve)<br />
Sterilisetur (let it be<br />
(to solve)<br />
sterilized)<br />
Solvetur (let it be<br />
Repetere<br />
III<br />
Repete (repeat)<br />
solved); Solventur (let<br />
(to repeat)<br />
them be solved)<br />
Repetatur (let it be<br />
Formare<br />
I<br />
Forma (form)<br />
repeated)<br />
(to form)<br />
Vertere<br />
III<br />
Verte (turn)<br />
Formetur (let it be<br />
(to turn)<br />
formed) Formentur (let<br />
them be formed)<br />
Fieri<br />
irregular verb<br />
–––<br />
–––<br />
(to be made, to be<br />
formed)<br />
Fiat/Fiant (let there be<br />
made)<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
1. Do ex. 1, p. 43 (the manual)<br />
2. Ex. 3, p. 43<br />
3. Translate the sentences into English: ex. 2, p. 43<br />
4. Learn the Latin sayings and aphorisms: p. 44.<br />
9
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Determine the conjugation <strong>of</strong> the verbs:<br />
1) filtrare; 2) audire; 3) dividere; 4) nocere; 5) tegere; 6) formare; 7) habere; 8)<br />
nutrire; 9) sumere; 10) vertere; 11) vocare; 12) repetere; 13) miscere; 14)<br />
terere; 15) distinguere.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />
a) I; b) II; c) III; d) IV.<br />
Test № 2<br />
Form the plural imperative <strong>of</strong> the verbs using the right ending:<br />
1) palpare; 2) munire; 3) recipere; 4) sterilisare; 5) miscere; 6) dividere; 7)<br />
auscultare; 8) nutrire; 9) vertere; 10) solvere; 11) dare; 12) repetere; 13)<br />
signare; 14) formare; 15) nocere.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />
a) –te; b) –ite.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
10
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module №2<br />
Content module №1<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the<br />
topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”<br />
<strong>The</strong> chemical nomenclature. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong><br />
elements, salts, oxides, esters.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Chemical nomenclature is a classified system <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> chemical<br />
elements and their compounds which are used as medicinal substances. Neither a<br />
formula nor the symbol <strong>of</strong> a chemical element but its Latin name is given in<br />
prescriptions.<br />
<strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> using the names <strong>of</strong> chemical compounds in prescriptions<br />
are the important aspect <strong>of</strong> the topic, that’s why it is necessary to know how Gen.<br />
sing. <strong>of</strong> this compounds is formed. So it is important to know the Latin names <strong>of</strong><br />
chemical elements, the ways <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> acids, oxides, salts,<br />
esters and to know how to use them in prescriptions.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know what the chemical nomenclature is.<br />
2. To know what Latin names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements are.<br />
3. To know the kinds <strong>of</strong> acids, the way <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> Latin names <strong>of</strong> acids.<br />
4. To know the kinds <strong>of</strong> oxides, the way <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> Latin names <strong>of</strong><br />
oxides.<br />
5. To know the kinds <strong>of</strong> salts, the way <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> Latin names <strong>of</strong> salts.<br />
6. To know how to translate the names <strong>of</strong> chemical compounds from Latin into<br />
English and on the contrary.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
School course <strong>of</strong> chemistry<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> Latin names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements,<br />
the structure <strong>of</strong> acids, oxides, salts and<br />
esters.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
3
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
1. Chemical nomenclature<br />
2. Chemical element<br />
3. Acid<br />
4. Oxide<br />
5. Salt<br />
6. Ester<br />
A classified system <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> chemical<br />
elements and compounds which are used as<br />
medicinal substances.<br />
<strong>The</strong> second declension neuter noun having the<br />
ending –um in Nom. sing.<br />
A chemical compound having a sour taste.<br />
Combination <strong>of</strong> elements <strong>of</strong> an average degree <strong>of</strong><br />
oxidation with oxygen.<br />
Compound substance, combination <strong>of</strong> alkali and acid<br />
in one.<br />
Organic combination containing oxygen.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What does chemical nomenclature include?<br />
2. What are the names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements?<br />
3. How are the names <strong>of</strong> acids formed?<br />
4. How are the names <strong>of</strong> oxides formed?<br />
5. How are the names <strong>of</strong> salts formed?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Translate into English, put in Gen. sing.:<br />
Acidum chloricum, Acidum nitricum, Acidum nitrōsum, Acidum<br />
acetylsalicylicum, Acidum hydrosulfuricum, Zinci oxydum, Magnesii peroxydum,<br />
4
Ferri oxydum, Papaverini hydrochloridum, Natrii iodidum, Argenti nitras, Natrii<br />
salicylas, Natrii hydrocarbonas, Calcii phosphas, Bismuthi subnitras, Natrii nitris,<br />
Sulfacylum-natrium, Norsulfazolum-natrium, Thiopentalum-natrium, Adrenalini<br />
hydrotartras, Oxacillinum-natrium, Kalii sulfis, Kalii chloridum.<br />
2. Translate into Latin:<br />
Boric acid, salicylic acid, sulphureous acid, nitric acid, nitrous acid, acetic<br />
acid, atropin sulphate, codeine phosphate, ephedrine hydrochloride, magnesium<br />
peroxide, sodium sulphite, sodium nitrite, ammonium bromide, potassium iodide,<br />
aluminium hydroxide, hydrogen peroxide, thiopentalum-sodium, sulphacylumsodium,<br />
sodium hydrocarbonate.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Chemical nomenclature is a classified system <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> chemical<br />
elements and their compounds which are used as medicinal substances. Neither a<br />
formula nor the symbol <strong>of</strong> a chemical element but its Latin name is given in<br />
prescriptions.<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements are the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension<br />
ending in -um. E. g.: Kalium, i n – potassium; Oxygenium, i n – oxygen; Zincum, i<br />
n – zinc.<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are two exceptions: Sulfur, ǔris n – sulphur; Phosphorus, i m –<br />
phosphorus.<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> acids<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> acids consist <strong>of</strong> the noun acidum, i n and the agreed adjective<br />
characterizing the degree <strong>of</strong> oxidation.<br />
5
1. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the acids with high degree <strong>of</strong> oxidation are made up with the<br />
suffix -ic-um. E .g.: acidum salicylicum – salicylic acid; acidum sulfuricum –<br />
sulphuric acid.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the acids with low degree <strong>of</strong> oxidation are made up with the<br />
suffix -os-um. E.g.: acidum sulfurosum – sulphureous acid; acidum nitrosum –<br />
nitrous acid.<br />
3. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> oxygenless acids are formed with the help <strong>of</strong> the prefix<br />
hydro – and the suffix -ic-um. E.g.: acidum hydrochloricum – hydrochloric acid;<br />
acidum hydrosulfuricum – hydrosulphuric acid.<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> oxides<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> oxides (oxydum, i n), peroxides (peroxydum, i n) and<br />
hydroxides (hydroxydum, i n) consist <strong>of</strong> two nouns: in the first place the name <strong>of</strong><br />
cation is put (a neuter noun <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension in Genetivus), in the second<br />
place the name <strong>of</strong> anion is put (a neuter noun <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension in<br />
Nominativus). E.g.: Zinci oxydum – zinc oxide; Hydrogenii peroxydum – hydrogen<br />
peroxide; Calcii hydroxydum – calcium hydroxide.<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> salts<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> salts consist <strong>of</strong> the name <strong>of</strong> cation in Gen. sing. and the name<br />
<strong>of</strong> anion in Nom. sing. Both cation and anion are nouns.<br />
Salts Examples Prefixes or suffixes<br />
in<br />
the names <strong>of</strong> anions<br />
1. With larger<br />
Natrii sulfas<br />
-as<br />
content <strong>of</strong> oxygen<br />
(sodium sulphate) (Gen. sing. -atis)<br />
2. With smaller<br />
Natrii sulfis<br />
-is<br />
content <strong>of</strong> oxygen<br />
(sodium sulphite) (Gen. sing. -itis)<br />
6
3. Salts <strong>of</strong><br />
oxygenless acids<br />
4. Salts <strong>of</strong><br />
oxygenless acids with<br />
organic base<br />
Natrii bromidum<br />
(sodium bromide)<br />
Morphini<br />
hydrochloridum<br />
(Morphine<br />
hydrochloride)<br />
-ǐdum<br />
(Gen. sing. -ǐdi)<br />
hydro-<br />
-id-um<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> basic salts<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> basic salts are formed by adding the prefix sub- to the name<br />
<strong>of</strong> anion. E. g.: Magnesii subcarbonas – magnesium subcarbonate.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> organic salts <strong>of</strong> sodium and potassium consist <strong>of</strong> the name<br />
<strong>of</strong> base and <strong>of</strong> the added to it through the hyphen the name natrium, kalium in<br />
Nominativus. E. g.:<br />
Barbitalum-natrium – barbitalum-sodium;<br />
Benzylpenicillinum-kalium – benzylpenicillinum-potassium.<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Translate into English:<br />
Argenti nitras; Kalii sulfus; Ferri oxydum; Magnesii peroxydum; acidum<br />
acetylsalicylicum; Natrii iodidum; Calcii phosphas; acidum hydrochloricum<br />
dilutum.<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Translate into Latin:<br />
Diluted solution <strong>of</strong> hydrogen peroxide; ointment <strong>of</strong> copper nitrate; the tablets<br />
<strong>of</strong> nicotinic acid; codeine phosphate in tablets; the solution <strong>of</strong> calcium chloride.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
7
Test № 1.<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> acids with high degree <strong>of</strong> oxidation are made up with the help<br />
<strong>of</strong> the suffix:<br />
a) -os-; b) -ic-; c) -ul-; d) -id-.<br />
Test № 2.<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> hydracids are formed with the help <strong>of</strong> the component:<br />
a) hyper-; b) hyp(o)-; c) hydr(o)-; d) hygr(o)-.<br />
Test № 3.<br />
Determine the names <strong>of</strong> anions:<br />
1) sulfas; 2) hydroiodidum; 3) mitris; 4) sulfidum; 5) arsenas; 6)<br />
hydrochloridum; 7) sulfis; 8) iodidum; 9) nitras; 10) hydrobromidum.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
a) salts <strong>of</strong> acids with larger content <strong>of</strong> oxygen;<br />
b) salts <strong>of</strong> acids with smaller content <strong>of</strong> oxygen;<br />
c) salts <strong>of</strong> hydracids;<br />
d) salts <strong>of</strong> hydracids with organic base.<br />
Test № 4.<br />
Determine the types <strong>of</strong> chemical compounds:<br />
1) acidum sulfuricum; 2) Argenti sulfas; 3) Hydrogenii peroxydum; 4)<br />
Hydrargyri cyanidum; 5) Calcii chloridum; 6) Benzylpenicillinum-natrium; 7)<br />
Aethylmorphini hydrochloridum; 8) Plumbi oxydum; 9) acidum hydrochloricum;<br />
10) Natrii benzoas.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
a) acids<br />
b) salts<br />
c) oxides<br />
8
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
9
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 1<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the<br />
topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”<br />
<strong>The</strong> pharmaceutical frequency cuts in the<br />
preparation names showing the chemical<br />
composition <strong>of</strong> the preparation, the frequency cuts<br />
<strong>of</strong> therapeutic, anatomic, physiological and<br />
pharmacological character<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Most chemical elements which are used as medications have two names:<br />
1. Scientific (systemic) name, in which the composition and location <strong>of</strong><br />
components correspond to the composition and structure <strong>of</strong> a chemical compound’s<br />
molecule.<br />
2. Trivial (agreed) name, which does not reflect the systematic principles <strong>of</strong><br />
scientific classification, but is convenient for practical use because <strong>of</strong> its simple<br />
phonetic and grammar structure and short form.<br />
Trivial names can denote the chemical composition <strong>of</strong> a medication, the<br />
pharmacological group it belongs to, its therapeutic effect, etc. That’s why it is<br />
necessary to know the combining forms denoting the chemical structure <strong>of</strong> the drug<br />
preparation and combining forms with therapeutic, anatomic, physiological and<br />
pharmacological meaning.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know the combining forms denoting the chemical structure <strong>of</strong> the drug<br />
preparation.<br />
2. To know the combining forms with therapeutic, anatomic, physiological and<br />
pharmacological meaning.<br />
3. To know how to distinguish different combining forms in the names <strong>of</strong><br />
medicinal preparations.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Anatomy, histology<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
3
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
1. Scientific (systemic)<br />
name<br />
2. Trivial (agreed) name<br />
<strong>The</strong> composition and location <strong>of</strong> components<br />
corresponding to the composition and structure <strong>of</strong> a<br />
chemical compound’s molecule.<br />
Convenient for practical use because <strong>of</strong> its simple<br />
phonetic and grammar structure and short form.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What combining forms denote the chemical structure <strong>of</strong> the drug<br />
preparation?<br />
2. Name the combining forms with therapeutic, anatomic, physiological and<br />
pharmacological meaning.<br />
3. Distinguish different combining forms in the names <strong>of</strong> medicinal<br />
preparations.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
1. Underline the combining forms in the names <strong>of</strong> preparations, explain their<br />
meaning:<br />
Cytophosphan, Amidopyrinum, Oxytocinum, Phlogex, Neodorm,<br />
Barbamylum, Biloton, Apothyrin, Mycoseptol, Cholenzymum, Testoviron,<br />
Morphocyclinum, Oxytetracyclinum, Diiodthyrosinum, Pyraphenum, Hypnogen,<br />
Viperalginum, Pyopan, Allergol, Methylsulfazinum, Anastress, Aminocainum.<br />
4
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Trivial names can denote the chemical composition <strong>of</strong> a medication, the<br />
pharmacological group it belongs to, its therapeutic effect, etc.<br />
Latin trivial names <strong>of</strong> drug preparations are the second declension neuter<br />
nouns with the ending –um in Nom. sing. As a rule, English equivalents <strong>of</strong> these<br />
names do not have the ending -um. Modern names <strong>of</strong> drug preparations do not<br />
<strong>of</strong>ten have the ending –um either. However, they are the second declension neuter<br />
nouns. In prescriptions they are written in Genetivus and have the ending –i which<br />
is added to the name in Nom. sing. E. g.:<br />
Nom. Hypnogen Allergol<br />
Gen. Hypnogeni Allergoli<br />
Combining forms which preserve their semantic meaning in the names <strong>of</strong><br />
drug preparations are also called pharmaceutical frequency parts (cuts) or termselements.<br />
Word-forming elements in the names <strong>of</strong> medicinal preparations<br />
№ Wordforminelement<br />
Meaning <strong>of</strong> term-<br />
Information about<br />
and its terms-elements Examples<br />
element origin<br />
1 2 3 4 5<br />
1. aesth- aesthesis (Greek)<br />
-feeling, sense<br />
anaesthetic<br />
Anaesthesinum<br />
2. aeth- ethyl,<br />
ethylene<br />
the presence <strong>of</strong><br />
ethyl, ethylene<br />
Aethazolum,<br />
Aethylmorphinum<br />
5
3. alg- algos (Greek),<br />
-pain<br />
anaesthetic<br />
action<br />
Analginum<br />
4. asthm- asthma (Greek),<br />
-asthma<br />
5. bil- bilis (Lat.)<br />
-gall, bile<br />
it is used in the<br />
names <strong>of</strong> the<br />
preparations <strong>of</strong> antiasthmatic<br />
group<br />
cholagogue<br />
Asthmatinum<br />
Bilitrastum<br />
6. card-<br />
cardia (Greek)<br />
cardiac remedy<br />
Cardiovalenum,<br />
cardi-<br />
-heart<br />
Corvalolum<br />
cor-<br />
cor (Lat.)<br />
-heart<br />
7. -cid caed- (Lat.)<br />
-to kill<br />
it kills a pathogenic<br />
organism<br />
Streptocidum<br />
8. chol- chole (Greek)<br />
-gall, bile<br />
cholagogue<br />
Chologonum<br />
9. cycl- cyclos (Greek)<br />
-circle<br />
antibiotic<br />
Cyclobarbitalum,<br />
Tetracyclinum<br />
6
10. glyc- glykys (Greek)<br />
-sweet<br />
toning up remedy<br />
Glycerinum,<br />
Glycerophosphas<br />
11. haem-<br />
haema (Greek)<br />
ctyptic,<br />
Haemostimulinum,<br />
(aem-)<br />
-blood<br />
stimulating,<br />
Haematogenum<br />
blood-forming<br />
12. hydr- hydor (Greek)<br />
water<br />
water<br />
Hydrogenium<br />
13. menth- mentha (Greek)<br />
-mint<br />
sedative<br />
Mentholum<br />
14. morph- morphe (Greek)<br />
-sleep<br />
anaesthetic<br />
Morphinum<br />
15. myc- myces (Greek) –<br />
fungus<br />
antibiotic<br />
Erythromycinum<br />
16. phen- phenol,<br />
phenyl<br />
the presence <strong>of</strong><br />
nitrogroup<br />
Phenobarbitalum<br />
7
17. suffixes<br />
nitrogen<br />
the presence <strong>of</strong><br />
Phthivazidum,<br />
-zid-<br />
nitrogroup<br />
Norsulfazolum<br />
-zin-<br />
-zol-<br />
18. pyr- pyr (Greek) –<br />
fever, fire<br />
febrifuge<br />
Amidopyrinum<br />
19. -cillinum antibiotic <strong>of</strong><br />
penicillin group<br />
preparations <strong>of</strong><br />
penicillin group<br />
Oxacillinum,<br />
Penicillinum<br />
20. -yl- hyle- (Greek) –<br />
substance<br />
substance <strong>of</strong> certain<br />
group<br />
aethylicus,<br />
salicylicus,<br />
methylicus<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Distinguish the word-forming elements, explain their meaning, translate the<br />
terms into English:<br />
Oxytetracyclini hydrochloridum, Phenoxymethylpenicillinum, Lincomycini<br />
hydrochloridum, Laevomycetinum, Bicillinum, Chlortetracyclinum,<br />
8
Benzylpenicillinum-kalium, Oxacillinum-natrium, Erythromycinum,<br />
Synthomycinum.<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Translate into Latin:<br />
solution <strong>of</strong> amidopyrin, tetracycline ointment, liniment <strong>of</strong> synthomycin,<br />
solution <strong>of</strong> ethylmorphine hydrochloride, phenoxymethylpenicillin for suspension,<br />
oleandomycin phosphate in tablets, dragee <strong>of</strong> tetracycline with nistatin, pyridoxyn.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test.<br />
Find the corresponding meaning <strong>of</strong> the Latin combining forms:<br />
1) glyk- a) blood<br />
2) morph- b) circle<br />
3) aesth- c) fungus<br />
4) cycl- d) fever<br />
5) chol- e) pain<br />
6) haem- f) bile<br />
7) alg- g) sleep<br />
8) pyr- h) to kill<br />
9) myc- i) sweet<br />
10) cid- j) sense<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
9
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
10
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 1<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the<br />
topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”<br />
Botanical nomenclature. Biliarity. <strong>The</strong> use<br />
<strong>of</strong> botanical names in pharmacology. <strong>The</strong> plant<br />
names in the nomenclature <strong>of</strong> medicinal raw<br />
materials<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Medicinal plants are widely used in pharmacology. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> medicinal<br />
herbs in botanical nomenclature are very <strong>of</strong>ten different from the plant names which<br />
are used in pharmaceutics, i. e. in the nomenclature <strong>of</strong> medicinal remedies.<br />
It is necessary to differentiate botanical and pharmaceutical names <strong>of</strong><br />
medicinal plants, to understand binominal nomenclature, according to which each<br />
plant (and animal) has two names: generic and specific, in order to use them<br />
correctly in prescriptions.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know what botanical nomenclature is.<br />
2. To differentiate botanical and pharmaceutical names <strong>of</strong> medicinal plants.<br />
3. To know the difference between generic and specific names <strong>of</strong> medicinal<br />
plants.<br />
4. To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> some botanical and pharmaceutical names <strong>of</strong><br />
medicinal plants in English.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Biology<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
Methods <strong>of</strong> classifying different kinds<br />
<strong>of</strong> plants. <strong>The</strong> basic knowledge <strong>of</strong><br />
generic and specific names <strong>of</strong> plants<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
3
Term<br />
Definition<br />
1. Generic name <strong>of</strong><br />
medicinal plant<br />
2. Specific name <strong>of</strong><br />
medicinal plant<br />
is expressed by a noun in Nominativus<br />
is expressed by an adjective or (seldom) by a noun<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What does botanical nomenclature include?<br />
2. How are botanical and pharmaceutical names <strong>of</strong> medicinal plants<br />
differentiated?<br />
3. What is the difference between generic and specific names <strong>of</strong> medicinal<br />
plants?<br />
4. Name five patterns <strong>of</strong> binominal names <strong>of</strong> medicinal plants.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Translate the word combinations into Latin:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> seeds <strong>of</strong> wild mustard. 2. <strong>The</strong> juice <strong>of</strong> raspberry. 3. <strong>The</strong> flowers <strong>of</strong><br />
violet. 4. <strong>The</strong> herb <strong>of</strong> anise. 5. <strong>The</strong> leaves and roots <strong>of</strong> belladonna.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> history <strong>of</strong> biology and medicine goes back to antiquity. <strong>The</strong> Roman<br />
naturalist, writer and scientist Pliny the Elder (23-79 A.D.) systematized flora and<br />
fauna in his work “Naturalis historia” (“History <strong>of</strong> nature”). 9 out <strong>of</strong> 37 books<br />
4
included the problems <strong>of</strong> medicine, the description <strong>of</strong> medicinal herbs and drug<br />
preparations. This work is regarded as an encyclopedia <strong>of</strong> the ancient medical<br />
knowledge.<br />
During Renaissance the fundamentals <strong>of</strong> medical and biological terminology<br />
were formed. Soon this terminology became international.<br />
In XVII-XVIII centuries there were a lot <strong>of</strong> botanical terms derived from<br />
Greek and Latin words. It was necessary to find new methods <strong>of</strong> classifying<br />
different kinds <strong>of</strong> plants. <strong>The</strong> Swedish scientist Carolus Linnaeus (1707-1778)<br />
introduced binominal nomenclature, according to which each plant (and animal)<br />
had two names: generic and specific. A generic name is a noun in Nom. and a<br />
specific name is usually an adjective or (seldom) a noun. Depending on how a<br />
specific name is expressed there are five patterns <strong>of</strong> binominal names:<br />
1. A noun in Nom. + a noun in Nom.: Artemisia absinthium (common<br />
wormwood).<br />
2. A noun in Nom. + a noun in Gen.: Primula veris (primrose).<br />
3. A noun in Nom. + a noun that cannot be declined: <strong>The</strong>obroma cacao<br />
(cocoa-tree).<br />
4. A noun in Nom. + a noun with an attribute: Arctostaphylos uva – ursi<br />
(bear berry).<br />
5. A noun in Nom. + an adjective: Crataegus oxyacantha (hawthorn).<br />
In the nomenclature <strong>of</strong> drug preparations the plants usually have only one<br />
name: generic or specific.<br />
If the botanical name corresponds to the first, third or fourth pattern, the<br />
name <strong>of</strong> medicinal substance (that is the pharmaceutical name <strong>of</strong> the plant) is as a<br />
rule a specific name. If the botanical name corresponds to the second or the fifth<br />
pattern, the name <strong>of</strong> medicinal substance is a generic name. E. g.:<br />
Pattern Botanical name Pharmaceutical name<br />
Pattern 1 Atropa belladonna Belladonna (deadly nightshade)<br />
5
Pattern 3<br />
Pattern 4<br />
Pattern 2<br />
Pattern5<br />
<strong>The</strong>obroma cacao<br />
Dryopteris filix-mas<br />
Primula veris<br />
Hypericum perforatum<br />
Cacao (cocoa-tree)<br />
Filix mas (male fern)<br />
Primula (primrose)<br />
Hypericum (Saint-John’s-wort)<br />
g.:<br />
However, sometimes botanical and pharmaceutical names are the same. E.<br />
Botanical name Pharmaceutical name Meaning<br />
Adonis vernalis<br />
Anisum vulgare<br />
Helichrysum arenarium<br />
Ledum palustre<br />
Polygonum hydropiper<br />
Rhamnus cathartica<br />
Rubus idaeus<br />
Viola tricolor<br />
Adonis vernalis<br />
Anisum vulgare<br />
Helichrysum arenarium<br />
Ledum palustre<br />
Polygonum hydropiper<br />
Rhamnus cathartica<br />
Rubus idaeus<br />
Viola tricolor<br />
pheasant’s eye<br />
anise<br />
everlasting<br />
Labrador-tea<br />
water pepper<br />
purging buckthorn<br />
raspberry<br />
violet<br />
Some pharmaceutical names are completely different from the botanical<br />
names <strong>of</strong> plants. However, they are very few.<br />
Botanical name Pharmaceutical name English name<br />
Brassica nigra<br />
Cassia acutifolia<br />
(Cassia angustifolia)<br />
Sinapis<br />
Senna<br />
Black mustard<br />
Senna<br />
6
Sometimes the same plant can have two botanical names, which were<br />
given by the same or different naturalists in different epochs. E. g.:<br />
Brassica nigra or Sinapis nigra<br />
Cassia acutifolia or Senna alexandrina<br />
In such cases the pharmaceutical names are derived from the botanical names<br />
<strong>of</strong> plants which were used in the later period.<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Translate into English:<br />
1. Gemmae Betulae. 2. Baccae Rubi idaei. 3. Secale cornutum. 4. Herba<br />
Plantaginis. 5. Flores Calendulae. 6. Cortex Quercus. 7. Folia Cerasi.<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Translate into Latin:<br />
1. Flowers <strong>of</strong> hawthorn. 2. Berries <strong>of</strong> elder. 3. Lily <strong>of</strong> the valley. 4. Nettle<br />
herb. 5. Crataegus root. 6. Sunflower oil emulsion. 7. Mint water.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Choose the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin names:<br />
1) Chelidonium; 2) Absinthium; 3) Digitalis; 4) Chamomilla; 5) Glycyrrhiza; 6)<br />
Mentha piperita; 7) Foeniculum; 8) Filix mas; 9) Hypericum; 10) Urtica.<br />
7
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
a) liquorice f) wormwood<br />
b) celadine g) pepper-mint<br />
c) St. John’s wort h) foxglove<br />
d) male fern i) camomile<br />
e) nettle j) fennel<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Choose the prescription variant <strong>of</strong> the compounds’ names:<br />
1. a) tinctura Crataegi ; 2. a) extractum Polygoni hydropiperis<br />
fluidum;<br />
b) tincturas Crataegi ; b) extracti Polygoni hydropiperis fluidi;<br />
c) tincturae Crataegi; c) extracto Polygoni hydropiperis fluido;<br />
3. a) pulveris radicis Frangulae; 4. a) aqua Menthae;<br />
b) pulveres radicis Frangulae; b) aquae Menthae;<br />
c) pulvis radix Frangula; c) aquam Menthae.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
8
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 2<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology<br />
<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />
Pharmacopoeia.<br />
<strong>The</strong> prescription, its grammatical structure,<br />
the patterns <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing. <strong>The</strong> structure<br />
<strong>of</strong> a prescription. <strong>The</strong> grammatical structure <strong>of</strong> the<br />
prescription phrase. <strong>The</strong> rules <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting.<br />
<strong>The</strong> detailed and brief samples <strong>of</strong><br />
prescription-writing.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Prescription is an address <strong>of</strong> a doctor to a pharmaceutical chemist with the<br />
instructions in medicine-preparing and giving it to a patient. Prescription is an<br />
important document, it should be written by a special form, without any corrections.<br />
While mastering the topic the student must know the structure <strong>of</strong> the<br />
prescription and the rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1) To know the definition <strong>of</strong> a prescription.<br />
2) To know the structure <strong>of</strong> the prescription.<br />
3) To know the rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing.<br />
4) To know the additional inscriptions in prescriptions.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Foreign language<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />
giving it to a patient<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Prescription<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Prescription is an address <strong>of</strong> a doctor to a<br />
pharmaceutical chemist with the instructions in<br />
medicine-preparing and giving it to a patient.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What is a prescription?<br />
2. How many parts does a prescription consist <strong>of</strong>? Characterize each <strong>of</strong> them.<br />
3. What are the rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing?<br />
4. What are the additional inscriptions in prescriptions?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Read the prescriptions, re-write them into the copy-book, write every word in<br />
the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into English:<br />
3
1) Recipe: Sulfuris depurati 2,0<br />
Glycerini<br />
Spiritus camphorati āā 5,0<br />
Aquae destillatae 60 ml<br />
Misce. Da. Signa<br />
2) Recipe: Anaesthesini<br />
Zinci oxydi<br />
Glycerini ana 10,0<br />
Aquae Plumbi ad 100 ml<br />
Misce. Da. Signa<br />
3) Recipe: Natrii tetraboratis<br />
Natrii hydrocarbonatis āā 20,0<br />
Natrii chloridi 10,0<br />
Olei Menthae guttas III<br />
Misce, ut fiat pulvis.<br />
Da. Signa<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Prescription is an address <strong>of</strong> a doctor to a pharmaceutical chemist with the<br />
instructions in medicine-preparing and giving it to a patient. Prescription is an<br />
important document, it should be written by a special form, without any corrections.<br />
A prescription consists <strong>of</strong> such parts:<br />
<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> a prescription<br />
1. Inscriptio (inscription), which includes the name <strong>of</strong> a medical<br />
<strong>establishment</strong>, its address, code and telephone number.<br />
2. Datum – the date <strong>of</strong> prescription – writing (day, month, year).<br />
3. Nomen et aetas aegroti – a patient’s name and age.<br />
4. Nomen medici – a doctor’s name.<br />
5. Invocatio, or ordinatio – the doctor’s address “Recipe” which means<br />
“Take”.<br />
6. Designatio materiarum – the enumeration <strong>of</strong> the medicinal substances <strong>of</strong><br />
which the medicine consists.<br />
<strong>The</strong> prescription is called simple, if only one substance is written in it. If<br />
there are several substances in the prescription, it is called a compound one. In the<br />
compound prescription the names <strong>of</strong> preparations are written in certain order:<br />
1) Basis (a basic remedy) – the substance with which a doctor is<br />
going to treat a patient;<br />
4
2) remedium adjuvans (an auxiliary remedy) – the substance<br />
which intensifies or weakens the basic remedy’s effect;<br />
3) remedium corrigens (a correcting remedy) – the substance<br />
which improves a medicine’s taste and smell;<br />
4) remedium constituens (a form-making remedy) – the<br />
substance which gives a final form to a medicine.<br />
It is natural that the compound prescription may not contain all these<br />
ingredients. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> toxic and narcotic remedies are always written in the<br />
beginning <strong>of</strong> the ingredients’ list.<br />
7. Subscriptio (subscription) – is the instruction to a pharmaceutical chemist<br />
about the following:<br />
a) what is necessary to do with the substances (to mix, to<br />
sterilize etc.);<br />
b) what form the medicine should have (tablets, powder,<br />
ointment, suppository etc.);<br />
c) how many doses should be given to a patient;<br />
d) in what packing (in the waxed or paraffined paper, in the<br />
dark glass etc.).<br />
8. Signatura (designation). In this part after the verb “Signa” or “Signetur”<br />
the rules <strong>of</strong> using the medicine are given in that language which a patient<br />
can understand.<br />
9. Nomen medici et sigillum personale – the doctor’s signature and personal<br />
seal.<br />
<strong>The</strong> rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing<br />
1. Nothing should be written under the word “Recipe”.<br />
2. All the names <strong>of</strong> the medicinal substances are written in column, one<br />
under another.<br />
3. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the medicinal substances are written in the genitive case<br />
(Gen.).<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> first word in the prescription line is always written with a capital<br />
letter.<br />
5. If the name <strong>of</strong> one medicinal substance (when it consists <strong>of</strong> several words)<br />
doesn’t go into one line, it should be carried over to the next line, a little<br />
way away from the beginning <strong>of</strong> the line.<br />
6. In the middle <strong>of</strong> the prescription line we should write with a capital letter:<br />
a) the names <strong>of</strong> medicinal plants;<br />
b) the names <strong>of</strong> medicinal preparations;<br />
c) the names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements;<br />
d) the names <strong>of</strong> cations in salts and oxides.<br />
7. We should write with a small letter in the middle <strong>of</strong> the prescription line:<br />
5
a) the names <strong>of</strong> plants’ parts (root, leaves, flowers etc.);<br />
b) adjectives and participles;<br />
c) the names <strong>of</strong> anions in salts and oxides.<br />
8. <strong>The</strong> quantity <strong>of</strong> medicinal substances is written to the right <strong>of</strong> them:<br />
a) the quantity <strong>of</strong> solid and dry substances is given in grammes and<br />
parts <strong>of</strong> a gramme. <strong>The</strong> words “gramme”, “decigramme”,<br />
“centigramme”, “milligramme” are not written in preseriptions, and<br />
the quantity is written by arabic numerals in a shape <strong>of</strong> decimal<br />
fractions, e. g.: 1,0 – one gramme; 0,3 – three decigrammes; 0,05 –<br />
five centigrammes etc.;<br />
b) the quantity <strong>of</strong> liquid substances is given in millilitres. E. g.: 100<br />
ml. If the quantity <strong>of</strong> a liquid is smaller than 1 ml, it is measured in<br />
drops. <strong>The</strong> quantity <strong>of</strong> drops is given by roman numerals, before<br />
which they write the word “drop” or “drops” in Acc. (the Latin).<br />
E. g.: guttam I – (take) one drop;<br />
guttas II – (take) two drops etc.<br />
c) there are substances which are measured out by units <strong>of</strong> action<br />
(UA). E. g.: 500 000 UA.<br />
9. If two or more substances are prescribed in equal quantities, they are<br />
written one under another and near the last one the word “ana” (āā) is put<br />
which means “equally”. E. g.:<br />
Recipe: Tincturae Belladonnae<br />
Tincturae Convallariae<br />
Tincturae Menthae āā 50 ml<br />
Misce. Da. Signa.<br />
10. It is allowed to write two prescriptions on one form. <strong>The</strong>y are separated<br />
from each other by such sign: #<br />
11. While prescribing some medicinal forms (pastes, suppositories) the<br />
quantity <strong>of</strong> a form-making substance may not be indicated. <strong>The</strong>n a<br />
pharmaceutical chemist may take as much as it is necessary (quantum<br />
satis).<br />
<strong>The</strong> additional inscriptions in prescriptions<br />
1. When a medicine is needed urgently, a doctor writes at the top <strong>of</strong> the<br />
prescription the words “Cito!” (quickly) or “Statim!” (immediately).<br />
2. If a doctor prescribes some medicine for himself, he writes in the<br />
prescription after the word “Signa” (or “Signetur”): “pro me” (for me) or<br />
“pro auctore” (for the author).<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
6
Task.<br />
Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />
Latin, memorize the spelling:<br />
1. Take: Of calcium chloride 10,0<br />
Of the distilled water 200 ml<br />
Mix. Give. Label.<br />
2. Take: Of castor oil 1,0<br />
Give such doses number 15 in gelatinous capsules<br />
Label.<br />
3. Take: Of silver nitrate<br />
Of the precipitated sulphur equally 1,5<br />
Of ethyl alcohol 96%<br />
Of glycerine equally 25 ml<br />
Of the distilled water 200 ml<br />
Mix. Give in the dark glass.<br />
Label.<br />
4. Take: Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> the pepper-mint 4 ml<br />
Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> the wormwood 6 ml<br />
Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> the valerian 8 ml<br />
Mix. Give. Label.<br />
5. Take: Of mercury salicylate<br />
Of the peach oil up to 180 ml<br />
Mix. Sterilize. Give.<br />
Label.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1<br />
Choose the prescription variant <strong>of</strong> the compounds’ name:<br />
1. a) spiritus aethylicus; 2. a) sulfur praecipitatum;<br />
b) spiritus aethylici; b) sulfuri praecipitato;<br />
c) spiritum aethylicum; c) sulfuris praecipitati;<br />
3. a) solutionis Iodi spirituosae; 4. a) aqua Menthae;<br />
b) solutio Iodi spirituosa; b) aquae Menthae;<br />
7
c) solutiones Iodi spirituosae; c) aquam Menthae;<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Insert the omitted verb in the prescription:<br />
Recipe: Synthomycini 0,2<br />
Butyri Cacao 3,0<br />
Misce, ut … suppositorium rectale<br />
Signa.<br />
a) fiunt<br />
b) fiant<br />
c) fit<br />
d) fiat<br />
e) fias<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
8
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 2<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology<br />
<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />
Pharmacopoeia.<br />
Latin nomenclature <strong>of</strong> medicinal forms. <strong>The</strong><br />
additional inscriptions in prescriptions.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Medicinal substances are such substances which are able in the certain<br />
quantity to remove the pathological process or to stand in the way <strong>of</strong> its<br />
development. <strong>The</strong>y are contained by raw materials. <strong>The</strong> products <strong>of</strong> medicinal raw<br />
materials which are formed by the way <strong>of</strong> purification from the ballast substances or<br />
with the help <strong>of</strong> chemical synthesis are called medicinal preparations. According to<br />
the degree <strong>of</strong> purification from the ballast substances the medicinal preparations are<br />
subdivided into simple and compound ones. Depending on the using <strong>of</strong> the<br />
constituent substances the medicinal forms are subdivided into solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t<br />
ones. <strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing the medicinal substances in prescriptions are the<br />
important aspect <strong>of</strong> the topic, that’s why it is necessary to know how Gen. sing. <strong>of</strong><br />
the medicinal preparations is formed.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To receive a common view <strong>of</strong> medicinal forms and to get acquainted with<br />
the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing them out:<br />
spelling;<br />
a) to learn to classify medicinal forms and know their characteristics;<br />
b) to master the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each medicinal form, their<br />
c) to learn to correctly write out solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms;<br />
d) to correctly use the verb forms <strong>of</strong> imperative and subjunctive moods which<br />
are used in prescriptions.<br />
2. To know the additional inscriptions in prescriptions.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Foreign language<br />
Russian language<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
Instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />
giving it to a patient<br />
3
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Prescription<br />
Dosage forms <strong>of</strong><br />
medications<br />
Solid, liquid, s<strong>of</strong>t<br />
Dosage routes:<br />
- enteral<br />
- parenteral<br />
Prescription is an address <strong>of</strong> a doctor to a<br />
pharmaceutical chemist with the instructions in<br />
medicine-preparing and giving it to a patient.<br />
Final products administered to the patient.<br />
All the medications divided according to the<br />
consistence <strong>of</strong> ingredients.<br />
Means <strong>of</strong> access to the site <strong>of</strong> action or systemic<br />
circulation:<br />
- through the alimentary canal;<br />
- not through the alimentary canal, but rather by<br />
injection.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. How are the medicinal forms classified according to the consistence <strong>of</strong><br />
ingredients?<br />
2. Into what groups are dosage routes divided?<br />
3. What medicinal forms belong to solid ones?<br />
4. What medicinal forms belong to liquid ones?<br />
5. What medicinal forms belong to s<strong>of</strong>t ones?<br />
6. Give the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each medicinal form.<br />
7. What are the additional inscriptions in prescriptions?<br />
4
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />
Latin, memorize the spelling:<br />
1. Take: Of the flowers <strong>of</strong> camomile<br />
Of the fruits <strong>of</strong> fennel equally 10,0<br />
Of the root <strong>of</strong> liquorice<br />
Of the leaves <strong>of</strong> pepper-mint equally 20,0<br />
Mix, let the herbal collection forms.<br />
Give.<br />
Label.<br />
#<br />
2. Take: Of the aloe syrup with iron 100 ml<br />
Give.<br />
Label.<br />
#<br />
3. Take: Of codeine phosphate 0,15<br />
Of phenobarbital 1,0<br />
Of potassium bromide<br />
Of sodium bromide equally 7,0<br />
Of sodium nitrate 1,0<br />
Of the distilled water up to 300 ml<br />
Mix. Give.<br />
Label.<br />
#<br />
5
4. Take: Of the spirituous solution <strong>of</strong> iodine 5% 2 ml<br />
Of tannin 3,0<br />
Of glycerine 10 ml<br />
Mix. Give.<br />
Label.<br />
#<br />
5. Take: Of white streptocide 5,0<br />
Of penicillin 200000 UA<br />
Mix, let the finest powder forms.<br />
Give.<br />
Label.<br />
#<br />
6. Take: Of hydrocortisone ointment 1% 10,0<br />
Give.<br />
Label.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Final products administered to the patient are called dosage forms <strong>of</strong><br />
medications.<br />
According to the consistence <strong>of</strong> ingredients all the medications are divided<br />
into solid (formae medicamentorum durae), liquid (formae medicamentorum<br />
fluidae), s<strong>of</strong>t (formae medicamentorum molles).<br />
6
Medications used for injections (formae medicamentorum pro injectionibus),<br />
for eye diseases (formae medicamentorum pro oculis), for infants and children<br />
under 3 years old (formae medicamentorum pro infantibus) form separate groups.<br />
Dosage routes (i. e. means <strong>of</strong> access to the site <strong>of</strong> action or systemic<br />
circulation) are divided into two groups: enteral (enterales) – through the alimentary<br />
canal; parenteral (parenterales) – not through the alimentary canal, but rather by<br />
injection through some other route, as subcutaneous, intramuscular, intraorbital,<br />
intracapsular, intraspinal, intrasternal, intravenous, etc.<br />
Solid medicinal forms<br />
pulveres (pulvis, ĕris m) – powders<br />
aspersiones (aspersio, onis f) – aspersions<br />
capsulae (capsula, ae f) – capsules<br />
tabulettae (tabuletta, ae f) – tablets<br />
pilulae (pilula, ae f) – pills<br />
glossettae (glossetta, ae f) – glossets<br />
granulae (granula, ae f) – granules<br />
dragée (indeclinable) – caramels<br />
species (species, ei f) – herbal collection<br />
charta sinapisata – mustard-poultice<br />
pulveres dentifrici – tooth-powders<br />
suppositoria (suppositorium, i n) – suppositories<br />
Liquid medicinal forms<br />
solutiones (solutio, onis f) – solutions<br />
guttae (gutta, ae f) – drops<br />
tincturae (tinctura, ae f) – tinctures<br />
extracta (extractum, i n) – extracts<br />
infusa et decocta (infusum, i n; decoctum, i n) – infusions and decoctions<br />
7
emulsa (emulsum, i n) – emulsions<br />
suspensiones (suspensio, onis f) – suspensions<br />
mixturae (mixtura, ae f) – mixtures<br />
mucilagines (mucilago, inis f) – mucilages<br />
sirupi (sirupus, i m) – syrups<br />
S<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms<br />
unguenta (unguentum, i n) – ointments<br />
linimenta (linimentum, i n) – liniments<br />
pastae stomatalogicae – stomatalogic pastes<br />
pastae dentales – toothpastes<br />
<strong>The</strong> additional inscriptions in prescriptions<br />
1. When a medicine is needed urgently, a doctor writes at the top <strong>of</strong> the<br />
prescription the words “Cito!” (quickly) or “Statim!” (immediately).<br />
2. If a doctor prescribes some medicine for himself, he writes in the<br />
prescription after the word “Signa” (or “Signetur”): “pro me” (for me) or<br />
“pro auctore” (for the author).<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task.<br />
Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />
Latin, memorize the spelling:<br />
1. Take: Of ichthyol 10,0<br />
8
Of salicylic acid 5,0<br />
Of turpentine 10,0<br />
Of lanolin 100,0<br />
Mix, let ointment forms.<br />
Give. Label.<br />
2. Take: Of the dense extract <strong>of</strong> male fern 6,0<br />
Divide into 6 equal parts.<br />
Give in gelatinous capsules.<br />
Label.<br />
3. Take: Of the infusion <strong>of</strong> senna leaves 10,0 – 150 ml<br />
Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> mint 1 ml<br />
Mix. Give.<br />
Label.<br />
4. Take: Of the fluid extract <strong>of</strong> nettle<br />
Of the fluid extract <strong>of</strong> wormwood equally 25 ml<br />
Mix. Give.<br />
Label.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
9
Choose the s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms:<br />
Variant 1 Variant 2<br />
1) tabuletta, ae f 1) pilula, ae f<br />
2) unguentum, i n 2) linimentum, i n<br />
3) infusum, i n 3) decoctum, i n<br />
4) pulvis, eris m 4) species, ei f<br />
5) emplastrum, i n 5) emulsum, i n<br />
6) dragee 6) sirupus, i m<br />
7) pasta, ae f 7) suppositorium, i n<br />
Test № 2.<br />
I. Suspension belongs to:<br />
1) s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms;<br />
2) solid medicinal forms;<br />
3) liquid medicinal forms.<br />
II. Mustard-poultice belongs to:<br />
1) s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms;<br />
2) solid medicinal forms;<br />
3) liquid medicinal forms.<br />
Test № 3.<br />
Choose the lines in which there are only liquid medicinal forms:<br />
1) decoctum, extractum fluidum;<br />
2) infusum, linimentum;<br />
3) mucilago, emulsum;<br />
4) solutio, species;<br />
5) mixtura, sirupus.<br />
10
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
11
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 2<br />
Latin language<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology<br />
<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />
Pharmacopoeia.<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies Prescription-writing <strong>of</strong> solid medicinal<br />
forms.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> medicinal forms are subdivided into solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t ones. Solid<br />
forms <strong>of</strong> medications are widely used in prescriptions. <strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing<br />
out the solid medicinal substances in prescriptions are the important aspect <strong>of</strong> the<br />
topic, that’s why it is necessary to know how Genetivus <strong>of</strong> the solid forms <strong>of</strong><br />
medications is formed.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To learn to classify medicinal forms and know their characteristics.<br />
2. To master the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each solid medicinal form,<br />
their spelling.<br />
3. To learn to correctly write out solid medicinal forms.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Foreign language<br />
Russian language<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
Instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />
giving it to a patient<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Powder<br />
Aspersion<br />
A substance made up <strong>of</strong> an aggregation <strong>of</strong> small<br />
particles, as that obtained by the grinding or<br />
trituration <strong>of</strong> a solid drug.<br />
3
Capsule<br />
Tablet<br />
Pill<br />
Glosset<br />
Granule<br />
Caramel<br />
Species<br />
Mustard-poultice<br />
Tooth-powder<br />
Suppository<br />
<strong>The</strong> most frequently used form <strong>of</strong> undivided powder<br />
which is prescribed for external use.<br />
A structure in which something is enclosed.<br />
A solid dosage form, which contains a medicinal<br />
substance in pure or diluted form.<br />
A dosage form for internal use.<br />
(Greek glossa – tongue) A small tablet prescribed for<br />
using under the tongue.<br />
A small pill made from sucrose; its mass is<br />
approximately 0,05.<br />
A sugar-coated pill or medicated confection.<br />
A mixture <strong>of</strong> some dried medicinal herbs or their<br />
parts which is used to prepare drug preparations.<br />
A sheet <strong>of</strong> paper coated with a thin layer <strong>of</strong> mustard<br />
powder.<br />
A white color powder the basic component <strong>of</strong> which<br />
is calcium carbonate.<br />
A medicated mass adapted for introduction into the<br />
rectal, vaginal, or urethral orifice <strong>of</strong> the body.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. How are the medicinal forms classified according to the consistence <strong>of</strong><br />
ingredients?<br />
2. What medicinal forms belong to solid ones?<br />
3. Give the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each solid medicinal form.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
4
Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />
Latin, memorize the spelling:<br />
1. Take: Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> St. John’s wort 10,0<br />
Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> valerian 20,0<br />
Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> celadine 10,0<br />
Mix. Give.<br />
Label.<br />
2. Take: Of naphthalane 40,0<br />
Of the precipitated sulphur<br />
Of tar equally 15,0<br />
Of the green soap 30,0<br />
Mix, let ointment forms.<br />
Give. Label.<br />
3. Take: <strong>The</strong> tablets <strong>of</strong> raunatin 0,002 number 100<br />
Give. Label.<br />
4. Take: Of the extract <strong>of</strong> belladonna 0,01<br />
Of the magnesium oxide<br />
Of the sodium hydrocarbonate equally 0,3<br />
Mix, let a powder forms.<br />
Give such doses number 12.<br />
Label.<br />
5
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Solid medicinal forms<br />
(Formae medicamentorum durae)<br />
pulveres (pulvis, ĕris m) – powders<br />
aspersiones (aspersio, onis f) – aspersions<br />
capsulae (capsula, ae f) – capsules<br />
tabulettae (tabuletta, ae f) – tablets<br />
pilulae (pilula, ae f) – pills<br />
glossettae (glossetta, ae f) – glossets<br />
granulae (granula, ae, f) – granules<br />
dragée (indeclinable) – caramels<br />
species (species, ei f) – species, herbal collection<br />
charta sinapisata – mustard-poultice<br />
pulveres dentifrici – tooth-powders<br />
suppositoria (suppositorium, i n) – suppositories<br />
Powders – pulveres<br />
Powder is a substance made up <strong>of</strong> an aggregation <strong>of</strong> small particles, as that<br />
obtained by the grinding or trituration <strong>of</strong> a solid drug.<br />
According to the number <strong>of</strong> ingredients the powders are divided into simple<br />
powders (pulveres simplices) and compound powders (pulveres compositi).<br />
According to the way <strong>of</strong> use:<br />
- pulveres ad usum externum (pro usu externo) – for external use;<br />
- pulveres ad usum internum (pro usu interno) – for internal use.<br />
According to the dosage:<br />
- pulveres divisi – divided powders;<br />
- pulveres indivisi – undivided powders.<br />
6
According to the way <strong>of</strong> administration:<br />
- pulveres pro dosi – powders to be taken only once;<br />
- pulveres pro die – powders for one day, daily dose.<br />
Powders are taken:<br />
- per os – by mouth;<br />
- per aspersionem – by aspersion;<br />
- per insufflationem – by insufflation;<br />
- per injectionem – by injection;<br />
- per rectum – through rectum;<br />
- per gargarisma – through gargling.<br />
Powders are given:<br />
- in capsulis operculatis – in coated capsules;<br />
- in capsulis chartaceis – in paper capsules;<br />
- in charta cerata – in waxed paper;<br />
- in charta paraffinata – in paraffin paper;<br />
- in charta pergaminata – in parchment paper.<br />
You should write: “Misce, ut fiat pulvis” in Subscriptio when prescribing<br />
compound powders.<br />
Aspersions – aspersiones<br />
Aspersion is the most frequently used form <strong>of</strong> undivided powder. It is<br />
prescribed for external use.<br />
When aspersions are prescribed, the therapeutic concentration <strong>of</strong> a medicinal<br />
substance is considered to be the basic value. Starch or talc are used as filters.<br />
Capsules – capsulae<br />
Capsule is a structure in which something is enclosed, such as a hard or a<br />
s<strong>of</strong>t, soluble container <strong>of</strong> a suitable substance, for enclosing a dose <strong>of</strong> medication,<br />
usually <strong>of</strong> that medication which has bad taste, smell or can affect mucous<br />
7
membrane <strong>of</strong> the oral cavity and teeth. It dissolves quickly in stomach or small<br />
intestine.<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are:<br />
- capsulae (gelatinosae) durae operculatae – solid (gelatinous) capsules with<br />
a lid;<br />
- capsulae (gelatinosae) molles – semisolid (gelatinous) capsules;<br />
- perlae gelatinosae – gelatinous pearls, or capsules which have oval form<br />
and the form <strong>of</strong> balls;<br />
- perlettae – capsules which are implanted subcutaneously by means <strong>of</strong><br />
surgery;<br />
- capsulae rectales – rectal capsules, or capsules which are inserted through<br />
rectum (per rectum).<br />
When prescribing drugs in gelatinous capsules, it is necessary to indicate the<br />
kind <strong>of</strong> capsules in Subscriptio as different capsules deliver medications to different<br />
parts <strong>of</strong> alimentary canal.<br />
Tablets – tabulettae<br />
Tablet is a solid dosage form, <strong>of</strong> varying weight, size, and shape, which may<br />
be moulded or compressed, and which contains a medicinal substance in pure or<br />
diluted form.<br />
According to the way <strong>of</strong> preparing the tablets are divided into:<br />
1. Oriblettae or tabulettae per os, tabulettae perorales – peroral tablets.<br />
2. Resoriblettae or tabulettae sub linguam, tabulettae sublinguales –<br />
sublingual tablets.<br />
3. Injectabulettae or tabulettae pro injectionibus – tablets for injectable<br />
solutions.<br />
4. Implantabulettae or tabulettae pro implantatione, tabulettae implantatae –<br />
tablets prepared in aseptic conditions for implantation.<br />
5. Solublettae or tabulettae pro gargarismatis, pro perlotionibus – tablets<br />
used to prepare solutions for gargling and irrigation.<br />
8
A lot <strong>of</strong> drug preparations are administered in enteric-coated tablets.<br />
Tablets are prescribed in two ways:<br />
1. When tablets do not have a code name, the names <strong>of</strong> their ingredients and<br />
doses are indicated. <strong>The</strong> amount and dosage form are indicated in<br />
Subscriptio.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> ingredients are not indicated when combined tablets (which have a<br />
code name) are prescribed.<br />
<strong>The</strong> weight <strong>of</strong> a tablet is not indicated only if the weight <strong>of</strong> an ingredient is<br />
fixed (standard).<br />
Pills – pilulae<br />
Pill is a dosage form for internal use. Pills have the form <strong>of</strong> balls with the<br />
mass <strong>of</strong> 0,1 to 0,5, prepared <strong>of</strong> the mass <strong>of</strong> pills. <strong>The</strong> pills with the mass more than<br />
0,5 are called boli (bolus, i m).<br />
<strong>The</strong> formula <strong>of</strong> prescribing the pills: Misce, ut fiant pilulae numero … (Mix<br />
to get the pills number …).<br />
Glossets – glossettae<br />
Glossets are small tablets prescribed for using under the tongue. <strong>The</strong> name<br />
“glossetta” is derived from Greek glossa – tongue.<br />
Granules – granula<br />
Granule is a small pill made from sucrose; its mass is approximately 0,05.<br />
Granules usually contain medicinal and additional substances (sugar, starch,<br />
talc, cocoa, chocolate, etc.).<br />
Granules are usually prescribed in a short form, as they are made at the<br />
pharmaceutical factories. <strong>The</strong>ir total amount is usually indicated.<br />
Caramels – dragee<br />
9
Caramel is a sugar-coated pill, or medicated confection. Vitamins are usually<br />
prescribed in the form <strong>of</strong> caramel. Caramels are prescribed in two ways:<br />
Rp.: Aminazini 0,025 Rp.: Dragee Aminazini 0,025 N 12<br />
D.t.d. N 12 in dragee<br />
D.S.: 1 dragee twice a day<br />
S.: 1 dragee twice a day<br />
Species – species<br />
Species is the mixture <strong>of</strong> some dried medicinal herbs or their parts (flowers,<br />
leaves, berries, roots, rootstock, etc.) which is used to prepare drug preparations.<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are such groups <strong>of</strong> species:<br />
1. Species ad infusa et de cocta – species for infusions and decoctions.<br />
2. Species fumales – species for smoking.<br />
3. Species pro balneis – species for having a bath.<br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>of</strong>ficinal species (prepared at the pharmaceutical factories) are prescribed<br />
in a short form whereas the magistral species (prepared in a pharmacy according to<br />
the physician’s prescription) are prescribed in a more detailed form.<br />
Mustard-poultice – charta sinapisata<br />
Mustard-poultice is a sheet <strong>of</strong> paper coated with a thin layer <strong>of</strong> the powder <strong>of</strong><br />
the skimmed mustard seeds. This <strong>of</strong>ficinal form is prescribed in a short form.<br />
Tooth-powders – pulveres dentifrici<br />
Tooth-powder is a powder <strong>of</strong> white color, the basic component <strong>of</strong> which is<br />
calcium carbonate. To get the finest chalk powder the method <strong>of</strong> chemical<br />
precipitation is used.<br />
10
Besides the precipitated calcium carbonate tooth-powders include essential<br />
oils (mint oil, oil <strong>of</strong> cloves, eucalyptus oil, anis oil), which impart pleasant smell<br />
and deodorant properties to them.<br />
Tooth-powders are divided into hygienic and medical preventive ones.<br />
Suppositories - suppositoria<br />
Suppository is a medicated mass adapted for introduction into the rectal,<br />
vaginal, or urethral orifice <strong>of</strong> the body; suppository bases are solid at room<br />
temperature but melt or dissolve at body temperature. Common bases for<br />
suppositories are: butyrum Cacao (cocoa butter), olea vegetabilia (vegetable oils),<br />
mixtura cum cera (cerated mixture), Lanolinum (lanolin).<br />
Other bases include glycerinated gelatine, hydrogenated vegetable oils,<br />
polyethylene glycols <strong>of</strong> various molecular weights, and fatty acid esters <strong>of</strong><br />
polyethylene glycol. <strong>The</strong> suppositories which are inserted through rectum are called<br />
suppositoria rectalia (rectal suppositories) and those which are inserted through<br />
vagina are called suppositoria vaginalia (vaginal suppositories). According to the<br />
form vaginal suppositories are divided into globuli (globules), bacilli (medicated<br />
bacilli), pessaria (pessaries). Suppositories are prescribed in a full or short form. If<br />
suppositories have a code name, the word Recipe is followed by the word<br />
Suppositoria and the name.<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task.<br />
Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />
Latin, memorize the spelling:<br />
Take: 10 tablets <strong>of</strong> furacin for external use.<br />
Give. Label: Dissolve 2 tablets in one glass <strong>of</strong> water.<br />
Use to gargle throat.<br />
11
Take: Analgin 0,25<br />
Amidopyrin 0,25<br />
Mix, let there be made some powder.<br />
Give 12 such doses.<br />
Label: one powder 3 times a day.<br />
Take: Reduced iron 1,0<br />
Give 15 such doses in gelatinous capsules.<br />
Label: 2 capsules 3 times a day after meals.<br />
Take: Antiasthmatic species 50.0<br />
Give in a sac.<br />
Label.<br />
Take: Dragee “Revitum”<br />
Give 100 such doses.<br />
Label: one dragee 3 times a day.<br />
Take: Leaves <strong>of</strong> peppermint 40,0<br />
Flowers <strong>of</strong> matricary 40,0<br />
Flovers <strong>of</strong> clover 20,0<br />
Milfoil 20,0<br />
Mix, let there be made some species.<br />
Give.<br />
Label: boil one tablespoon <strong>of</strong> mixture in 0,5 glass <strong>of</strong> water.<br />
Take 3 times a day.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
12
Test № 1.<br />
<strong>The</strong> maximum mass <strong>of</strong> the tablet “ad usum internum” must not be more than:<br />
a) 0,5 b) 1,0 c) 0,1<br />
Test № 2.<br />
tea”:<br />
Choose the pharmaceutical term corresponding to the English one “sedative<br />
a) species diaphoreticae;<br />
b) species nervinae;<br />
c) species antiasthmaticae;<br />
d) species cholagogae;<br />
e) species carminative<br />
Test № 3.<br />
Choose the lines in which there are only solid medicinal forms:<br />
1) suspensio, tinctura;<br />
2) pulvis, granulum;<br />
3) emulsum, dragee;<br />
4) solutio, linimentum;<br />
5) sirupus, mucilago<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
13
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 2<br />
Latin language<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology<br />
<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />
Pharmacopoeia.<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies Prescription-writing <strong>of</strong> s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal<br />
forms.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> medicinal forms are subdivided into solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t ones. S<strong>of</strong>t<br />
forms <strong>of</strong> medications are widely used in prescriptions. <strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing<br />
out the s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal substances in prescriptions are the important aspect <strong>of</strong> the<br />
topic, that’s why it is necessary to know how Genetivus <strong>of</strong> the s<strong>of</strong>t forms <strong>of</strong><br />
medications is formed.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To learn to classify medicinal forms and know their characteristics.<br />
2. To master the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal form,<br />
their spelling.<br />
3. To learn to correctly write out s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Foreign language<br />
Russian language<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
Instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />
giving it to a patient<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Ointment<br />
Liniment<br />
A semisolid preparation for external application to<br />
the body, usually containing a medicinal substance<br />
and a special base.<br />
3
Paste<br />
A liquid ointment which looks like homogeneous<br />
mucilaginous mass or dense liquid which melts<br />
under the body temperature.<br />
A semisolid preparation, generally for external use,<br />
<strong>of</strong> a fatty base, a viscous or mucilaginous base, or a<br />
mixture <strong>of</strong> starch and petrolatum.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. How are the medicinal forms classified according to the consistence <strong>of</strong><br />
ingredients?<br />
2. What medicinal forms belong to s<strong>of</strong>t ones?<br />
3. Give the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal form.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />
English, memorize the spelling:<br />
1. Rp.: Unguenti Furacillini 1,0% 25,0<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: lubricate the affected skin regions.<br />
2. Rp.: Ichthyoli 4,0<br />
Zinci oxydi<br />
Amyli ana 10,0<br />
Lanolini 80,0<br />
Misce, fiat pasta.<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: zinc paste.<br />
4
3. Rp.: Acidi salicylici 1,0<br />
Hydrargyri amidochloridi<br />
Bismuthi subnitratis аnа 3,0<br />
Vaselini<br />
Lanolini ana 15,0<br />
Misce, fiat unguentum<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: ointment to геmоvе freckles.<br />
4. Rp.: Natrii fluoratis<br />
Bolus albae аnа 1,0<br />
Glycerini 1,2<br />
Misce, fiat pasta<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: to embrocate the paste into the sensitive<br />
dentine fог 2-3 months.<br />
5. Rp.: Extracti Belladonnae 0,015<br />
Novocaini 0,2<br />
Xer<strong>of</strong>ormii 0,1<br />
Ichthyoli 0,2<br />
Butyri Сасао quantum satis, ut fiat suppositorium rectale<br />
Da tales doses numero 20.<br />
Signa: оnе suppository 2 times а day.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
S<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms<br />
(Formae medicamentorum molles)<br />
unguenta (unguentum, i n) – ointments<br />
linimenta (linimentum, i n) – liniments<br />
5
pastae stomatalogicae – stomatologic pastes<br />
pastae dentales – toothpastes<br />
Ointments – unguenta<br />
Ointment is a semisolid preparation for external application to the body,<br />
usually containing a medicinal substance and a special base. Vaselinum – vaseline,<br />
Lanolinum – lanolin, adeps suillus depuratus (or axungia porcina) – depurated<br />
pork lard are common bases for an ointment.<br />
Eye ointments are called: oculenta or unguenta ophthalmica or unguenta<br />
pro oculis.<br />
<strong>The</strong> prescriptions for ointments are written in a full or short form.<br />
Officinal ointments and the ointments containing only one medicinal<br />
substance are prescribed in a short way.<br />
When ointments are prescribed in a full form, the names <strong>of</strong> medicinal<br />
substances, the base for an ointment and their amount are indicated. You should<br />
write in Subscriptio: Misce, fiat unguentum.<br />
Liniments – linimenta<br />
Liniment is a medicinal form for external use. Liniments are liquid ointments<br />
which look like homogeneous mucilaginous mass or dense liquid which melts under<br />
the body temperature. Liniments are used for rubbing into the skin and grinding, for<br />
application to wounds, burns, ulcers. <strong>The</strong> bases for liniments are vaseline oil,<br />
linseed-oil, sunflower oil and other oils. Before using a liniment should be shaked.<br />
Pastes – pastae<br />
Paste is a semisolid preparation, generally for external use, <strong>of</strong> a fatty base, a<br />
viscous or mucilaginous base, or a mixture <strong>of</strong> starch and petrolatum. It is the<br />
undivided form <strong>of</strong> medications. Thus, a paste consists <strong>of</strong> different powders (talc,<br />
starch or zinc oxide) and a base. It is a preparation similar to an ointment, but<br />
6
thicker and stiffer, that penetrates the skin less than an ointment. Pastes are<br />
prescribed in the same way as ointments.<br />
Stomalogic pastes<br />
A special version <strong>of</strong> pastes is stomatologic pastes which are prepared in small<br />
amounts in the presence <strong>of</strong> a patient. <strong>The</strong> composition <strong>of</strong> such pastes includes<br />
powderlike medicinal preparations (sometimes in the combination with liquid ones)<br />
to which as a filler glycerine, vaseline oil, vegetable oils are added to reach the<br />
necessary consistence.<br />
Stomatologic pastes are prescribed only in a full form, specifying all the<br />
ingredients.<br />
Toothpastes<br />
Toothpastes are allocated into a separate version. <strong>The</strong>y are subdivided into<br />
two groups:<br />
1) hygienic toothpastes; 2) medical preventive toothpastes.<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />
English, memorize the spelling:<br />
1. Rp.: Iod<strong>of</strong>ormii 0,01<br />
Butyri Сасао quantam satis.<br />
Misce, ut fiat bacillus longitudine 6 сm et diametro 3 mm<br />
Dа tales doses numеro 6.<br />
Signa: insert оnе suppository 2 times а day.<br />
7
2. Rp.: Emplastri Рlumbi simplicis 50,0<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: apply to the affected skin region.<br />
3. Rp.: Extracti Bursae раstoгis sicci<br />
Extracti Secalis cornuti аnа 3,0<br />
Pulveris radicis Glycyrrhizae quantum satis,<br />
ut fiant pilulae numеro 30.<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: оnе рill 3 times а day after meals.<br />
4. Rp.: Unguenti Tetracyclini ophthalmici 10,0<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: eye ointment. Apply to the lower eyelid 3-5 times a day<br />
5. Rp.: Suppusitoria “Bethiolum” numero 10<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: for hemorrhoids and anal fissures.<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Traпslate the prescriptioпs iпto Latiп. Prescribe:<br />
1. 50 grams <strong>of</strong> ointment for freezing (frost-bite). Тhе patient should rub а<br />
little ointment onto open skin regions.<br />
2. Ointment which consists <strong>of</strong>: one gram <strong>of</strong> resorcin, 10 grams <strong>of</strong><br />
vaseline. Label: ointment. Apply to the affected skin regions.<br />
3. 60 pills which include: 0,03 <strong>of</strong> crystallized sodium arsenate; 3,0 <strong>of</strong><br />
quinine hydrochloride; extract and powder <strong>of</strong> licorice root as muсh as<br />
is required. Тhe patient should take one pill 2-3 times а day.<br />
4. 40 rectal suppositories. Тhе constituents are: 0,3 euphylline, 3,0 сосоа<br />
8
utter. Тhе patient should insert 1 suppository 2 times а day.<br />
5. 10 suppositories with glycerin. Тhе patient should insert 1 suppository<br />
once а day 15-20 minutes after meals.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
I. Liniment belongs to:<br />
1) s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms;<br />
2) solid medicinal forms;<br />
3) liquid medicinal forms.<br />
Test № 1.<br />
II. Suppository belongs to:<br />
1) s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms;<br />
2) solid medicinal forms;<br />
3) liquid medicinal forms.<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Choose the s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms:<br />
Variant 1 Variant 2<br />
1) tabuletta, ae f 1) pilula, ae f<br />
2) unguentum, i n 2) linimentum, i n<br />
3) infusum, i n 3) decoctum, i n<br />
4) pulvis, eris m 4) species, ei f<br />
5) emplastrum, i n 5) emulsum, i n<br />
6) dragee 6) sirupus, i m<br />
7) pasta, ae f 7) suppositorium, i n<br />
Test № 3.<br />
9
Choose the lines in which there are only s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms:<br />
1) decoctum, extractum fluidum;<br />
2) unguentum, linimentum;<br />
3) mucilago, emulsum;<br />
4) solutio, species;<br />
5) mixtura, sirupus.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
10
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 2<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology<br />
<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />
Pharmacopoeia.<br />
Prescription-writing <strong>of</strong> liquid medicinal<br />
forms.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> medicinal forms are subdivided into solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t ones. Liquid<br />
forms <strong>of</strong> medications are widely used in prescriptions. <strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing<br />
out the liquid medicinal substances in prescriptions are the important aspect <strong>of</strong> the<br />
topic, that’s why it is necessary to know how Genetivus <strong>of</strong> the liquid forms <strong>of</strong><br />
medications is formed.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To learn to classify medicinal forms and know their characteristics.<br />
2. To master the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each liquid medicinal form,<br />
their spelling.<br />
3. To learn to correctly write out liquid medicinal forms.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Foreign language<br />
Russian language<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
Instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />
giving it to a patient<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Solution<br />
A liquid preparation containing one or several<br />
soluble chemical substances usually dissolved in<br />
water or other dissolving medium.<br />
3
Drop<br />
Tincture<br />
Extract<br />
Infusion<br />
Decoction<br />
Emulsion<br />
Suspension<br />
Mixture<br />
Mucilage<br />
Syrup<br />
A minute sphere <strong>of</strong> liquid as it hangs or falls.<br />
An alcoholic or hydroalcoholic solution prepared<br />
from animal or vegetable drugs or from chemical<br />
substances.<br />
A concentrated preparation <strong>of</strong> a vegetable or animal<br />
drug obtained by removing the active constituents<br />
therefrom with a suitable menstruum, evaporating all<br />
or nearly the solvent and adjusting the residual mass<br />
or powder to a prescribed standard.<br />
A product <strong>of</strong> steeping <strong>of</strong> a substance in water for the<br />
extraction <strong>of</strong> its medicinal principles.<br />
A medication or other substance prepared by boiling.<br />
A preparation <strong>of</strong> one liquid distributed in small<br />
globules throughout the body <strong>of</strong> a second liquid.<br />
A preparation <strong>of</strong> a finely divided drug intended to be<br />
incorporated (suspended) in some suitable liquid<br />
vehicle (water, oil, glycerine) before it is used, or<br />
already incorporated in such a vehicle.<br />
A liquid medicinal form which is formed by<br />
dissolving one or several solid substances or by<br />
mixing two or more substances between themselves.<br />
An artificial viscid paste <strong>of</strong> gum or dextrin used in<br />
pharmacy as a vehicle or excipient or in therapy as a<br />
demulcent.<br />
A concetrated solution <strong>of</strong> sugar, such as sucrose, in<br />
water or other aqueous liquid, sometimes with some<br />
medicinal substance added.<br />
4
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. How are the medicinal forms classified according to the consistence <strong>of</strong><br />
ingredients?<br />
2. What medicinal forms belong to liquid ones?<br />
3. Give the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each liquid medicinal form.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />
English, memorize the spelling:<br />
1. Rp.: Solutionis Proserini 0,05% 1 ml<br />
Da tales doses numero 6 in ampullis<br />
Signa: one ml 1-2 times a day.<br />
2. Rp.: Extracti Polygoni hydropiperis fluidi<br />
Extracti Viburni fluidi ana 20 ml<br />
Misce. Da.<br />
Signa: 25-30 drops two times a day.<br />
3. Rp.: Infusi florum Arnicae ex 10,0 – 200 ml<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: one tablespoon 3 times a day.<br />
4. Rp.: Suspensionis Grise<strong>of</strong>ulvini 100,0<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: one dessertspoon 3 times a day.<br />
5. Rp.: Emulsi olei jecoris Aselli 100 ml<br />
5
Da.<br />
Signa: one tablespoon 2 times a day.<br />
6. Rp: Tincturae Strophanthi 5,0<br />
Tincturae Convallariae<br />
Tincturae Valerianae ana 10,0<br />
Misceatur. Detur.<br />
Signetur: 20 drops 3 times a day.<br />
7. Rp.: Sirupi Aloёs 30 ml<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: one tablespoon 3 times a day.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Liquid medicinal forms<br />
(Formae medicamentorum molles)<br />
solutiones (solutio, onis f) – solutions<br />
guttae (gutta, ae f) – drops<br />
tincturae (tinctura, ae f) – tinctures<br />
extracta (extractum, i n) – extracts<br />
infusa et decocta (infusum, i n; decoctum, i n) – infusions and decoctions<br />
emulsa (emulsum, i n) – emulsions<br />
suspensiones (suspensio, onis f) – suspensions<br />
mixturae (mixtura, ae f) – mixtures<br />
mucilagines (mucilago, inis f) – mucilages<br />
sirupi (sirupus, i m) – syrups<br />
Solutions – solutiones<br />
6
Solution is a liquid preparation containing one or several soluble chemical<br />
substances usually dissolved in water or other dissolving medium (solvent) for<br />
various reasons.<br />
According to the purpose <strong>of</strong> use solutions are divided into:<br />
1. Solutiones pro injectionibus – solutions for injections.<br />
2. Solutiones ad usum externum – solutions for external use: gargarismata –<br />
for gargling; lotiones – for lotions; collutoria – for rinsing mouth; enemata<br />
or clysmata – for enemas; liturae – for lubrication; perlotiones – for<br />
irrigation; frictiones – for embrocation.<br />
3. Solutiones ad usum internum – solutions for internal use.<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are also solutiones pro anaesthesia (solutions for anaesthesia),<br />
solutiones plasmosubstituentes (solutions for the substitution <strong>of</strong> plasma).<br />
Solutions are given in: ampullis (ampules); rectiolis (rectal pipettes, which<br />
contain 3-5 ml <strong>of</strong> solution for microenemas).<br />
Prescriptions for solutions are written in a short and full forms.<br />
In a short form the word Recipe is followed by the word Solutionis, the name<br />
<strong>of</strong> medicinal substance, the concentration <strong>of</strong> solution in percents and its amount,<br />
In a full form the word Recipe is followed by the name <strong>of</strong> a medicinal<br />
substance, its amount and the name <strong>of</strong> a solvent.<br />
Drops – guttae<br />
Drop is a minute sphere <strong>of</strong> liquid as it hangs or falls.<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are:<br />
Oculoguttae – eye drops (medicated oil or water to be dropped into eyes).<br />
Nasoguttae – nose drops (medicated solution to be dropped into the nose).<br />
Otoguttae – ear drops (medicated oil or water to be dropped into the external<br />
auditory meatus).<br />
Guttae “Denta” – dental drops.<br />
Small amount <strong>of</strong> drops (5-10 ml) is prescribed in a full or short form.<br />
7
Dental drops are usually <strong>of</strong>ficinal and are prescribed in a short form.<br />
Tinctures – tincturae<br />
Tincture is an alcoholic or hydroalcoholic solution prepared from animal or<br />
vegetable drugs or from chemical substances. Tinctures usually have some colour.<br />
<strong>The</strong>y are <strong>of</strong>ficinal drug forms.<br />
When some tincture is prescribed, the word Recipe is followed by the name<br />
<strong>of</strong> a dosage form (that is: Tincturae) and then by the name <strong>of</strong> a plant and total<br />
amount in ml. When alcoholic tincture is prescribed, the word spirituosae is not<br />
written. But if ether tincture is prescribed, the word aethereae should be written.<br />
Extracts – extracta<br />
Extract is a concentrated preparation <strong>of</strong> a vegetable or animal drug obtained<br />
by removing the active constituents therefrom with a suitable menstruum,<br />
evaporating all or nearly all the solvent and adjusting the residual mass or powder to<br />
a prescribed standard.<br />
According to the extractor all extracts are divided into:<br />
extracta aquosa (water extracts);<br />
extracta oleosa (oil extracts);<br />
extracta spirituosa (spirituous, alcoholic extracts);<br />
extracta aetherea (ethereous extracts).<br />
NB! Only one etherous extract is used: Extractum Filicis maris aethereum.<br />
According to their consistency extracts are divided into: extracta fluida<br />
(fluid), spissa (thickened), sicca (dry), that is they are prepared in three forms:<br />
semiliquid or <strong>of</strong> syrupy consistency, pilular or solid, and as dry powder.<br />
Extracts are prescribed in the same way as tinctures, but their consistency<br />
should be indicated.<br />
8
Infusions and decoctions – infusa et decocta<br />
Infusion is a product <strong>of</strong> steeping <strong>of</strong> a substance in water for the extraction <strong>of</strong><br />
its medicinal principles.<br />
Decoction is a medication or other substance prepared by boiling.<br />
Infusions and decoctions are prescribed only in a short form. <strong>The</strong> amount <strong>of</strong><br />
vegetable raw materials and the amount <strong>of</strong> infusion and decoction are indicated.<br />
Emulsions – emulsa<br />
Emulsion is a preparation <strong>of</strong> one liquid distributed in small globules<br />
throughout the body <strong>of</strong> a second liquid. Pharmaceutical emulsions for which <strong>of</strong>ficial<br />
standards have been promulgated include cod-liver oil emulsion, cod-liver oil<br />
emulsion with malt, liquid petrolatum emulsion, and phenolphthalen in liquid<br />
petrolatum emulsion.<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are emulsa oleosa (oil or false emulsions) and emulsa seminalia or<br />
emulsa seminum (true emulsions).<br />
Emulsions are prescribed in a full or short form.<br />
Suspensions – suspensiones<br />
Suspension is a preparation <strong>of</strong> a finely divided drug intended to be<br />
incorporated (suspended) in some suitable liquid vehicle (water, oil, glycerine)<br />
before it is used, or already incorporated in such a vehicle.<br />
Suspensions are used pro injectionibus (for injections); ad usum externum<br />
(for external use); ad usum internum (for internal use).<br />
Suspensions can be siccae (dry) and ex tempore (which should be prepared).<br />
Suspensions are prescribed in a full or short form.<br />
Mixtures – mixturae<br />
9
Mixture is a liquid medicinal form which is formed by dissolving one or<br />
several solid substances or by mixing two or more substances between themselves<br />
(solutions, tinctures, extracts, mucilage etc.). Mixtures can be limpid, turbid and<br />
with sediment.<br />
Mixtures are prescribed for both internal and external use.<br />
Mucilages – mucilagines<br />
Mucilage – 1) an artificial viscid paste <strong>of</strong> gum or dextrin used in pharmacy as<br />
a vehicle or excipient or in therapy as a demulcent; 2) a naturally formed viscid<br />
principle in a plant, consisting <strong>of</strong> a gum dissolved in the juices <strong>of</strong> the plant (gummi<br />
arabicum – arabic gum, gummi Armeniacae – gum <strong>of</strong> the apricot, amylum – starch,<br />
semina Lini – seeds <strong>of</strong> the flax, radix Althaeae – root <strong>of</strong> marsh-mallow).<br />
Mucilages are rarely prescribed separately (per se). <strong>The</strong>y are usually<br />
prescribed in mixtures, that is 20-25 % <strong>of</strong> mucilages are added to the mixtures.<br />
Syrups – sirupi<br />
Syrup is a concetrated solution <strong>of</strong> sugar, such as sucrose, in water or other<br />
aqueous liquid, sometimes with some medicinal substance added. <strong>The</strong> <strong>of</strong>ficinal<br />
preparation is a solution <strong>of</strong> sucrose in purified water, and is used as a flavoured<br />
vehicle in pharmaceutical preparations. E. g.:<br />
sirupus Rhei – syrup <strong>of</strong> rhubarb;<br />
sirupus Althaeae – syrup <strong>of</strong> marsh-mallow;<br />
sirupus Glycyrrhizae – syrup <strong>of</strong> licorice;<br />
sirupus simplex – simple syrup;<br />
sirupus Rubi idaei – syrup <strong>of</strong> raspberry.<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
10
A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />
English, memorize the spelling:<br />
1. Rp.: Solutionis Glucosi 40 % 20 ml<br />
Dа in ampullis numero 6.<br />
Signa.<br />
2. Rp.: Suspensionis Hydrocortisoni acetatis 2,5 % 5 ml<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: one ml once a week (5 injections for the course <strong>of</strong> treatment).<br />
3. Rp.: Oxytetracyclini 1,0<br />
Olei Amygdalarum ad 100,0<br />
Misce, fiat suspensio<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: оnе teaspoon 3 times а day.<br />
4. Rp.: Seminum Amygdalarum dulcium 10,0<br />
Aquae destillatae ad 100 ml<br />
Misce, fiat emulsum<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: one tablespoon 3 times a day.<br />
5. Rp.: Xer<strong>of</strong>ormii<br />
Picis liquidae ana 3,0<br />
Olei Ricini 100 ml<br />
11
Misce, fiat linimentun<br />
Da.<br />
Signa: balsamic liniment.<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Traпslate the prescriptioпs iпto Latiп. Prescribe:<br />
1. 6 ampules <strong>of</strong> 2,5 % promethazine hydrochloride solution. <strong>The</strong> patient should be<br />
given 1 ml intramuscular injections.<br />
2. 200 ml <strong>of</strong> tincture made from 20 grams <strong>of</strong> water pepper. <strong>The</strong> patient should take<br />
one tablespoon 3 times a day.<br />
3. 6 ampules <strong>of</strong> 2,5 % desoxycorticosterone trimethylacetat. <strong>The</strong> patient should be<br />
given 1 ml intramuscular injections for two weeks.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1<br />
Choose the prescription form <strong>of</strong> the term:<br />
a) spiritus aethylicus;<br />
b) spiritui aethilico;<br />
c) spiritum aethylicum;<br />
d) spiritus aethylici;<br />
e) spiritu aethylico.<br />
Test № 2<br />
Choose the liquid medicinal forms:<br />
12
Variant 1 Variant 2<br />
1) tabuletta, ae f 1) pilula, ae f<br />
2) unguentum, i n 2) linimentum, i n<br />
3) infusum, i n 3) decoctum, i n<br />
4) pulvis, eris m 4) species, ei f<br />
5) emplastrum, i n 5) emulsum, i n<br />
6) dragee 6) sirupus, i m<br />
7) pasta, ae f 7) suppositorium, i n<br />
Test № 3.<br />
Choose the lines in which there are only liquid medicinal forms:<br />
1) decoctum, extractum fluidum;<br />
2) unguentum, linimentum;<br />
3) mucilago, emulsum;<br />
4) solutio, species;<br />
5) mixtura, sirupus.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
13
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 2<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology<br />
<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />
Pharmacopoeia.<br />
Abbreviations in prescriptions and<br />
abbreviation-reading. <strong>The</strong> current control <strong>of</strong> the<br />
module.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
When prescribing drugs physicians <strong>of</strong>ten use set abbreviations. <strong>The</strong>y have<br />
fixed form to avoid ambiguity. Many Latin abbreviations are still in use.<br />
Knowledge <strong>of</strong> these abbreviations is essential for the dispensing pharmacist and<br />
<strong>of</strong>ten useful for the prescriber.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1) To know the definition <strong>of</strong> an abbreviation.<br />
2) To know the rules <strong>of</strong> abbreviating in prescriptions.<br />
3) To know what names <strong>of</strong> ingredients are not abbreviated.<br />
4) To know how words can be shortened in Praescriptio.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Foreign language<br />
Russian language<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
Instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />
giving it to a patient<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Abbreviation<br />
A conventional reduction <strong>of</strong> words while writing,<br />
and also a word composed by reduction <strong>of</strong> two or<br />
more words.<br />
3
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What is an abbreviation?<br />
2. What are the rules <strong>of</strong> abbreviating in prescriptions?<br />
3. What names <strong>of</strong> ingredients are not abbreviated?<br />
4. How can words be shortened in Praescriptio?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Read the prescriptions, re-write them into the copy-book, write every word in<br />
the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into English:<br />
1. Rp.: Choles medicatae conservatae 250,0<br />
Da.<br />
Signa.<br />
2. Rp.: Olei Terebinthinae<br />
Olei Camphorae<br />
Chlor<strong>of</strong>ormii ana 100,0<br />
Misce. Da.<br />
Signa.<br />
3. Rp.: Extracti Frangulae fluidi 0,15<br />
Extracti Viburni fluidi<br />
Herbae Thymi ana 20 ml<br />
Misce. Da.<br />
Signa.<br />
4. Rp.: Olei Ricini 1,0<br />
Da tales doses numero 15 in capsulis gelatinosis.<br />
Signa.<br />
4
5. Rp.: Acidi hydrochlorici diluti 5 ml<br />
Pepsini 2 ml<br />
Aquae purificatae 180 ml<br />
Sirupi Cerasi 200 ml<br />
Misce. Da.<br />
Signa.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
When prescribing drugs physicians <strong>of</strong>ten use set abbreviations. <strong>The</strong>y have<br />
fixed form to avoid ambiguity. Many Latin abbreviations are still in use.<br />
Knowledge <strong>of</strong> these abbreviations is essential for the dispensing pharmacist and<br />
<strong>of</strong>ten useful for the prescriber.<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are some rules <strong>of</strong> abbreviating in prescriptions:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> dosage forms, galenicals, plants’ structures, directions given<br />
to the pharmacist and some expressions are usually shortened.<br />
2. Abbreviations always end in a consonant. If a syllable which is to be<br />
shortened ends in two or more consonants all <strong>of</strong> them are written in an abbreviation.<br />
E. g. : supp. is the abbreviation <strong>of</strong> the word suppositorium.<br />
3. Ingredients having a similar name are not abbreviated to avoid confusion,<br />
e. g.: sulfas and sulfis.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> poisonous and drastic drugs are not abbreviated.<br />
5. In Praescriptio words can be shortened to one letter: D.t.d.N. – Da<br />
(Dentur) tales doses numero…<br />
<strong>The</strong> most important prescription abbreviations<br />
Abbreviation Full writing in Latin Translation into English<br />
5
āā<br />
ac, acid.<br />
amp.<br />
aq.<br />
aq. destill.<br />
but.<br />
D.<br />
D. S.<br />
D. t. d.<br />
Div. in p. aeq.<br />
extr.<br />
f.<br />
fl.<br />
fol.<br />
gttm.<br />
gtts.<br />
inf.<br />
in ampull.<br />
in tab.<br />
lin.<br />
M.<br />
N.<br />
ol.<br />
pil.<br />
ppt., praec.<br />
pulv.<br />
q. s.<br />
r., rad.<br />
Rp.<br />
Rep.<br />
ana<br />
acidum<br />
ampulla<br />
aqua<br />
aqua destillata<br />
butyrum<br />
Da<br />
Da. Signa<br />
Da tales doses<br />
Divide in partes aequales<br />
extractum<br />
fiat (fiant)<br />
flos<br />
folium<br />
guttam (sing.)<br />
guttas (plur.)<br />
infusum<br />
in ampullis<br />
in tabulettis<br />
linimentum<br />
Misce<br />
numero<br />
oleum<br />
pilula<br />
praecipitatus<br />
pulvis<br />
quantum satis<br />
radix<br />
Recǐpe<br />
Repĕte<br />
equally<br />
acid<br />
ampoule, ampule<br />
water<br />
the distilled water<br />
butter<br />
Give<br />
Give. Mark.<br />
Give such doses<br />
Divide into equal parts<br />
extract<br />
let … forms (form)<br />
flower<br />
leaf<br />
drop<br />
drops<br />
infusion<br />
in ampoules<br />
in tablets<br />
liniment<br />
Mix<br />
number<br />
oil<br />
pill<br />
precipitated<br />
powder<br />
as much as nesessary<br />
root<br />
Take<br />
Repeat<br />
6
hiz<br />
S.<br />
simpl.<br />
sir.<br />
sol.<br />
Steril.<br />
supp.<br />
tab.<br />
t-ra, tinct., tct.<br />
ung.<br />
vitr.<br />
rhizoma<br />
Signa<br />
simplex<br />
sirupus<br />
solutio<br />
Sterilisa<br />
suppositorium<br />
tabuletta<br />
tinctura<br />
unguentum<br />
vitrum<br />
rhizome<br />
Mark<br />
simple<br />
syrup<br />
solution<br />
Sterilize<br />
suppository<br />
tablet<br />
tincture<br />
ointment<br />
glass<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Translate the prescriptions into Latin,write them in the full and short forms:<br />
1. Take: <strong>The</strong> tablets “Aёronum” number 10<br />
Give.<br />
Label.<br />
2. Take: Of valerian tincture<br />
Of lily <strong>of</strong> the valley tincture 10 ml<br />
Of belladonna tincture 2,5 ml<br />
Of menthol 0,1<br />
Mix. Give.<br />
Label.<br />
7
3. Take: Of camphor oil 20 % 1 ml<br />
Give in ampules number 6<br />
Label.<br />
4. Take: Of infusion <strong>of</strong> the labrador-tea herb 10,0 – 150 ml<br />
Of marsh-mallow syrup 25,0<br />
Mix. Give.<br />
Label.<br />
5. Take: Of ointment <strong>of</strong> white precipitated mercury 5 % 30,0<br />
Give.<br />
Label.<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Write the prescriptions without abbreviations, translate them into English:<br />
Rp.: Supp. cum Euphyllino 0,2 № 6<br />
D.<br />
S.<br />
Rp.: Ac. borici 5,0<br />
Zinci oxydi 25,0<br />
Ung. Naphthalani 45,0<br />
Am. Tritici 25,0<br />
M. D. S.<br />
Rp.: Mentholi 0,1<br />
Ol. Persicorum 10,0<br />
8
M. D. S.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
If the tablets are written out in the short form the word “tablets” is put in:<br />
a) Nom. plur.<br />
b) Gen. plur.<br />
c) Acc. Plur.<br />
Test № 2<br />
Choose the correct answer:<br />
1) <strong>The</strong> abbreviation “D.” means:<br />
a) decoctum;<br />
b) dilutus;<br />
c) depuratus;<br />
d) Da.<br />
2) <strong>The</strong> abbreviation “f.” means:<br />
a) flos;<br />
b) fiat;<br />
c) fluidus;<br />
d) folium.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
9
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
10
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 3<br />
Latin language.<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology<br />
Clinical terminology.<br />
studies<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
<strong>The</strong> notion “clinical term”. <strong>The</strong> kinds <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terms. <strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> terms-composites<br />
in Latin and English.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> better you can analyze medical terms, that is know how to find their<br />
stems, suffixes, prefixes, and comprehend the meaning <strong>of</strong> Greek and Latin<br />
components, the easier you will learn them.<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are two main ways <strong>of</strong> forming new words in Latin:<br />
1. Affixation (adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem).<br />
2. Word combination (when two or more stems go together to form a new<br />
word).<br />
As far as clinical terms are formed mainly by the old Greek language, the<br />
students should learn Greek stems and other combining forms <strong>of</strong> the Latin words,<br />
including word terminations.<br />
Clinical terminology is one <strong>of</strong> the most difficult subsystems <strong>of</strong> the medical<br />
terminology. It includes both the names <strong>of</strong> diseases or pathologic processes and the<br />
ways <strong>of</strong> their examination and treatment.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1) To know what languages are used in medical naming.<br />
2) To know the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms.<br />
3) To know what clinical terms are by position.<br />
4) To know how terms-elements are joined into terms.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Anatomy, histology<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
3
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Clinical term<br />
Affixation<br />
Word combination<br />
Word termination<br />
A compound word formed by the joining <strong>of</strong> two or<br />
more word-forming elements derived from Greek on<br />
the whole.<br />
Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />
Joining <strong>of</strong> two or more stems to form a new word.<br />
A steady element <strong>of</strong> a compound word which has<br />
constant meaning and can form several terms.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What languages are used in medical naming?<br />
2. What is the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms?<br />
3. What are clinical terms by position?<br />
4. How are terms-elements joined into terms?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Translate the terms intoEnglish:<br />
Embryologia, brachycephalia, histologia, odontogenes, sphygmographia,<br />
stomatomycosis, cryotherapia, pyuria, angiopathia, hyperacusia, tocologia,<br />
galactorrhoea, chirurgia, laparotomia, somatometria, dysosmia, haemostasis,<br />
phlebostenosis, splanchnoptosis, otorrhagia.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
4
It has turned out historically that the Greeks have originated sciences and<br />
have given their lexical material for the naming <strong>of</strong> scientific and everyday objects.<br />
Later on this word-forming tradition passed to the Romans. Both Greek and Latin<br />
languages are used in scientific naming. Greek terms-elements are used more <strong>of</strong>ten<br />
in the clinical terminology, Latin ones – in the anatomic terminology.<br />
A lot <strong>of</strong> clinical terms (names <strong>of</strong> diseases, pathological processes, methods <strong>of</strong><br />
investigation and treatment etc.) are compound words formed by the joining <strong>of</strong> two<br />
or more word-forming elements derived from Greek on the whole. By their position<br />
terms-elements may be initial (standing in the beginning <strong>of</strong> a word), intermediate<br />
(in the middle <strong>of</strong> a word), finite (in the end <strong>of</strong> a word). E. g.:<br />
hyper-glyk-aemia (the heightened content <strong>of</strong> sugar in the blood);<br />
chole-cyst-itis (the inflammation <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder).<br />
One and the same term-element may be initial as well as finite. Depending on<br />
the position it may change its form: haem-o-philia, haemat-uria, ur-aemia.<br />
Terms-elements are joined between themselves directly or with the help <strong>of</strong><br />
connecting vowels. If the second term-element begins with a vowel, the connecting<br />
vowel is usually not used. If the second term-element begins with a consonant, the<br />
joining vowel is used. When Greek terms-elements are joined the connecting vowel<br />
-o- is used, when Latin ones are joined, the connecting vowels -i- or -o- are used.<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task<br />
Translate the terms into Latin:<br />
1. Any joint disease. 2. Displacement <strong>of</strong> the liver. 3. Excision <strong>of</strong> the kidney.<br />
4. A pathological accumulation <strong>of</strong> air in tissues or organs. 5. Bile in the blood. 6.<br />
5
<strong>The</strong> scientific study <strong>of</strong> the problems <strong>of</strong> ageing. 7. Very rapid breathing. 8.<br />
Abnormally increased muscular function or activity. 9. Narrowing <strong>of</strong> the vessel. 10.<br />
A chronic disease <strong>of</strong> adults characterized by enlargement <strong>of</strong> many parts <strong>of</strong> the<br />
skeleton. 11. Science which studies psychical diseases. 12. Surgical incision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
gallbladder.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1<br />
<strong>The</strong> term-element sten- has the meaning:<br />
a) strength;<br />
b) narrowing;<br />
c) sternum<br />
Test № 2<br />
<strong>The</strong> term-element hidr- has the meaning:<br />
a) water;<br />
b) sweat;<br />
c) humidity<br />
Test № 3<br />
Choose the Greek stems corresponding to the Latin terms:<br />
1) cerebrum a) anthrop-<br />
2) ruber b) chir-<br />
3) pectus c) prosop-<br />
4) gustus d) encephal-<br />
5) homo e) steth-<br />
6) dulcis f) erythr-<br />
6
7) articulatio g) dacry-<br />
8) manus h) glyk-<br />
9) lacrima i) geus-<br />
10) facies j) arthr-<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
7
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 3<br />
Latin language.<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology.<br />
Clinical terminology.<br />
studies<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Word-formation. Latin prepositions in the<br />
role <strong>of</strong> prefixes.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> word-formation with the help <strong>of</strong> prefixes is called “with a prefix” way <strong>of</strong><br />
the word-formation. “With a prefix” way is productive and wide-spread in the<br />
medical terminology. Prefixes are always added to the root and form new words <strong>of</strong><br />
the same lexical grammatical class. Thus, the learning <strong>of</strong> Latin prefixes broadens<br />
the students’ vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> knowledge <strong>of</strong> the “with a prefix” word-forming<br />
components helps to comprehensive perception <strong>of</strong> terms and memorizing for a long<br />
time.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1) To know what languages are used in medical terminology.<br />
2) To know in what terminology Latin prefixes usually occur.<br />
3) To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used prefixes formed by Latin<br />
prepositions and particles.<br />
4) To know the rules <strong>of</strong> assimilation <strong>of</strong> the final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix with the<br />
first consonant <strong>of</strong> a stem.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Anatomy, histology<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
3
Affixation<br />
Prefix<br />
Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />
A part <strong>of</strong> a word, a morpheme, standing before a<br />
root.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1) What languages are used in medical terminology?<br />
2) In what terminology do Latin prefixes usually occur?<br />
3) What is the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used prefixes formed by Latin<br />
prepositions and particles?<br />
4) What are the rules <strong>of</strong> assimilation <strong>of</strong> the final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix with the<br />
first consonant <strong>of</strong> a stem?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Find the prefixes in the terms, determine the their meaning, translate the<br />
terms into English:<br />
1. Foveola suprameatica.<br />
2. Musculus depressor septi nasi.<br />
3. Foramina intravertebralia.<br />
4. Sulcus arteriae subclaviae.<br />
5. Margo superciliaris.<br />
6. Venae conjunctivales.<br />
7. Musculus extensor digiti minimi.<br />
8. Pars postsulcalis posterior.<br />
9. Arteria recurrens.<br />
10. Musculus adductor pollicis.<br />
11. Complexus ossium.<br />
4
12. Impressiones digitatae.<br />
13. Transfusio sanguinis.<br />
14. Insufficientia valvae mitralis.<br />
15. Articulatio composita.<br />
16. Nervus sublinguales.<br />
17. Nodi lymphatici praepericardiales.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Both Latin and Greek prefixes are used in medical terminology. Some <strong>of</strong><br />
them are formed by prepositions and particles and have literal meaning. <strong>The</strong>y can<br />
also express non-literal meaning (especially in clinical disciplines). <strong>The</strong>se prefixes<br />
do not change the meaning <strong>of</strong> a stem but intensify it.<br />
Latin prefixes usually occur in anatomical and histological terminology and<br />
Greek ones are widely used in clinical terminology.<br />
Combining forms derived from adjectives (Greek mes(o) – from mesos –<br />
middle), and Latin or Greek numerals (Latin uni – one, single; bi – twice; Greek<br />
mono – one, single; di – twice) which are placed in front <strong>of</strong> a word are also called<br />
prefixes.<br />
<strong>The</strong> final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix is <strong>of</strong>ten assimilated with the first consonant <strong>of</strong><br />
a stem, e. g.: afferens – afferent, conveying towards the centre (from ad – ferens);<br />
difficilis – difficult (from dis – facilis).<br />
<strong>The</strong> prefix in- followed by the consonants b, m, p changes into im-, e. g.:<br />
imberbis – beardless (from in – barba – beard); immobilis – immobile (from in –<br />
mobilis – mobile); impotentia – impotence (from in – potentia – potency).<br />
<strong>The</strong> prefix in- followed by the consonants l and r changes into il- and ircorrespondingly,<br />
e. g.: illaesus – not damaged, without lesion (from in – laesus –<br />
hurt, damaged); irrationalis – irrational (from in – rationalis – rational).<br />
Latin prepositions are usually attached to Latin stems, and Greek ones are<br />
attached to Greek stems, e. g.: pertussis – whooping cough (from Latin per –<br />
5
throuhg, tussis – cough); anaemia – anaemia (from Greek an – neg., -aemia –<br />
blood).<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are exceptions to this rule, i. e. there are some cases when a Greek<br />
prefix is attached to the stem <strong>of</strong> a Latin word, and a Latin prefix is attached to the<br />
stem <strong>of</strong> a Greek word, e. g.; endocervicalis – endocervical (from Greek prefix<br />
endo- and Latin word cervicalis); intrathoracalis – intrathoracic (from Latin prefix<br />
intra- and Greek word thoracalis).<br />
PREFIXES FORMED BY LATIN PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES<br />
Latin prefix Meaning Examples<br />
a-, ab-,<br />
absadantecircumcum-:<br />
colcom-<br />
away from, from<br />
to or toward,<br />
addition to<br />
prior to or<br />
in front <strong>of</strong><br />
around<br />
with or together<br />
abasia abasia – inability to walk<br />
abductio abduction – the act <strong>of</strong> abducting<br />
(drawing away) or <strong>state</strong> <strong>of</strong> being abducted<br />
abstinentia abstinence – a retaining from the<br />
use <strong>of</strong> or indugence in food, stimulants, or<br />
sexual intercourse<br />
adductor adductor – the muscle which adducts<br />
(is drawn toward)<br />
afferens afferent – conveying toward a centre<br />
antebrachium antebrachium – the part <strong>of</strong> the<br />
upper member <strong>of</strong> the body between the elbow<br />
and the wrist<br />
antenatalis antenatal – prenatal<br />
circumscriptus cirtumscribed – bounded or<br />
limited; confined to a limited space<br />
collateralis collateral – secondary or accessory;<br />
not direct or immediate<br />
compositus – compound<br />
6
concorcocontradedidise-,<br />
exextra-<br />
against, opposed<br />
1) deterioration,<br />
becoming<br />
worse;<br />
2) down or<br />
away from<br />
cessation,<br />
reversal, or<br />
removal;<br />
3) negation or<br />
privation<br />
apart<br />
reversal or<br />
separation, or<br />
duplication<br />
away from,<br />
outside<br />
outside <strong>of</strong>,<br />
beyond, or in<br />
addition<br />
1) in or into;<br />
concentratio concentration: 1) increase in<br />
strength by evaporation; 2) the ratio <strong>of</strong> the mass<br />
or volume <strong>of</strong> a solute to the mass or volume <strong>of</strong><br />
the solution or solvent<br />
correlatio correlation – the degree to which<br />
one phenomenon or random variable is<br />
associated with or can be predicted from another<br />
coordinatio co-ordination – the harmonious<br />
functioning <strong>of</strong> interrelated organs and parts<br />
contraindicatio contraindication – any<br />
condition, especially any condition <strong>of</strong> disease,<br />
which renders some particular line <strong>of</strong> theatment<br />
undesirable or improper<br />
denervatio denervation – resection or removal<br />
<strong>of</strong> the nerves to an organ or part<br />
descendens descending – extending inferiorly<br />
destructivus destructive – causing destruction,<br />
destroying<br />
divergentia divergence – a spreading or<br />
tending apart<br />
disseminatio dissemination – distribution over<br />
a considerable area<br />
eventratio eventration – protrusion <strong>of</strong> the<br />
bowels from the abdomen<br />
7
ininfrainterintraobperpostpraeproresesubsuper-;<br />
supra-<br />
2) not<br />
interior to, below<br />
or beneath<br />
between or<br />
among<br />
within, into, or<br />
during<br />
against, toward<br />
throughout in<br />
space or time<br />
after or behind<br />
before, in front<br />
<strong>of</strong><br />
before, in front<br />
<strong>of</strong><br />
back, again<br />
apart<br />
under, or<br />
subordinate<br />
1) above, more<br />
than normal,<br />
excessive;<br />
exitus exitus: 1) death; 2) an exit or outlet<br />
extracellularis extracellular – outside a cell or<br />
cells<br />
incapsulatio encapsulation – the formation <strong>of</strong><br />
a capsule<br />
insanabilis incurable – not susceptible <strong>of</strong><br />
being cured<br />
infraorbitalis infraorbital – lying on or under<br />
the inferior surface <strong>of</strong> the orbit<br />
intervertebralis intervertebral – situated<br />
between two contiguous vertebrae<br />
intravenosus intravenous – within a vein or<br />
veins<br />
obturatio obturation – the act <strong>of</strong> closing or<br />
occluding<br />
perforatio perforation: 1) the act <strong>of</strong> boring or<br />
piercing through a part; 2) a hole made through a<br />
part or substance<br />
posticus posticus – posterior<br />
posthaemorrhagicus posthaemorrhagic – that<br />
which appeared or happened after haemorrhage<br />
praematurus premature – occuring before the<br />
proper time<br />
prominentia prominentia – a prominence,<br />
protrusion, or projection<br />
reversio reversion – a returning to a previous<br />
condition; regression<br />
8
trans-<br />
2) next, above in<br />
rank<br />
through, across<br />
or beyond<br />
revaccinatio revaccination – a second<br />
vaccination<br />
separatio separation – the process <strong>of</strong> taking<br />
apart or the <strong>state</strong> <strong>of</strong> having been taken apart<br />
sublingualis sublingual – located beneath the<br />
tongue<br />
subacutus subacute – somewhat acute;<br />
between acute and chronic<br />
superficialis superficial – pertaining to or<br />
situated near the surface<br />
suprarenalis suprarenal – situared superior to<br />
a kidney<br />
superinfectio superinfection – a new infection<br />
complicating the course <strong>of</strong> antimicrobal therapy<br />
<strong>of</strong> an existing infectious process, and resulting<br />
from invasion by bacteria or fungi resistant to<br />
the drugs in use<br />
transfusio – transfusion<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the terms into English,<br />
memorize the spelling:<br />
Anatomical terms<br />
Histological terms<br />
vas afferens<br />
substantia intercellularis<br />
9
ursa subcutanea<br />
musculus extensor<br />
margo interosseus<br />
fovea sublingualis<br />
stratum intermedium<br />
textus connectivus<br />
tubulus transversus<br />
canaliculus intracelularis<br />
tubulus convolutus<br />
Clinical terms<br />
abscessus cerebri; graviditas extrauterina tubaria; divergentia absoluta;<br />
arthritis posttraumatica; vitium cordis congenitum; fractura intraarticularis;<br />
perforatio ulceris.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
<strong>The</strong> English prefix “inside” corresponds to the Latin prefix:<br />
a) infrab)<br />
intrac)<br />
interd)<br />
suprae)<br />
post-<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Which Latin prefix corresponds to the English prefix “between”:<br />
a) extrab)<br />
infrac)<br />
intrad)<br />
inter-<br />
10
e) supra-<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
11
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 3<br />
Latin language.<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology.<br />
Clinical terminology.<br />
studies<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Greek prefixes. <strong>The</strong> analysis <strong>of</strong> the termscomposites<br />
written in Latin and English. <strong>The</strong> Greek<br />
alphabet, the rules <strong>of</strong> reading <strong>of</strong> letter combinations and<br />
aboveline signs.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> word-formation with the help <strong>of</strong> prefixes is called “with a prefix” way <strong>of</strong><br />
the word-formation. “With a prefix” way is productive and wide-spread in the<br />
medical terminology. Prefixes are always added to the root and form new words <strong>of</strong><br />
the same lexical grammatical class. Thus, the learning <strong>of</strong> Greek prefixes broadens<br />
the students’ vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> knowledge <strong>of</strong> the “with a prefix” word-forming<br />
components helps to comprehensive perception <strong>of</strong> terms and memorizing for a long<br />
time.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1) To know what languages are used in medical terminology.<br />
2) To know in what terminology Greek prefixes usually occur.<br />
3) To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used Greek prefixes.<br />
4) To know the rules <strong>of</strong> assimilation <strong>of</strong> the final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix with the<br />
first consonant <strong>of</strong> a stem.<br />
5) To be acquainted with the Greek alphabet, the rules <strong>of</strong> reading <strong>of</strong> letter<br />
combinations and aboveline signs.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Anatomy, histology<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
3
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Affixation<br />
Prefix<br />
Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />
A part <strong>of</strong> a word, a morpheme, standing before a<br />
root.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1) What languages are used in medical terminology?<br />
2) In what terminology do Greek prefixes usually occur?<br />
3) What is the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used Greek prefixes?<br />
4) What are the rules <strong>of</strong> assimilation <strong>of</strong> the final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix with the<br />
first consonant <strong>of</strong> a stem?<br />
5) What are the rules <strong>of</strong> reading <strong>of</strong> letter combinations and aboveline signs in<br />
the Greek language?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Find the prefixes in the terms, determine their meaning, translate the terms<br />
into English:<br />
1. Vena hemiazygos accessoria.<br />
2. Apophysis anularis.<br />
3. Canalis hypoglossus.<br />
4. Processus paramastoideus.<br />
5. Synchondroses sternales.<br />
6. Capsula fibrosa perivascularis.<br />
7. Ductus endolymphaticus.<br />
8. Musculus epicranius.<br />
4
9. Tractus mesencephalicus nerve trigeminalis.<br />
10. Pars sympathica.<br />
11. Toberculum epiglotticum.<br />
12. Fascia parotidea.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Both Latin and Greek prefixes are used in medical terminology. Some <strong>of</strong><br />
them are formed by prepositions and particles and have literal meaning. <strong>The</strong>y can<br />
also express non-literal meaning (especially in clinical disciplines). <strong>The</strong>se prefixes<br />
do not change the meaning <strong>of</strong> a stem but intensify it.<br />
Latin prefixes usually occur in anatomical and histological terminology and<br />
Greek ones are widely used in clinical terminology.<br />
Combining forms derived from adjectives (Greek mes(o) – from mesos –<br />
middle), and Latin or Greek numerals (Latin uni – one, single; bi – twice; Greek<br />
mono – one, single; di – twice) which are placed in front <strong>of</strong> a word are also called<br />
prefixes.<br />
<strong>The</strong> final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix is <strong>of</strong>ten assimilated with the first consonsnt <strong>of</strong><br />
a stem, e. g.: afferens – afferent, conveying towards the centre (from ad – ferens);<br />
difficilis – difficult (from dis – facilis).<br />
<strong>The</strong> prefix in- followed by the consonants b, m, p changes into im-, e. g.:<br />
imberbis – beardless (from in – barba – beard); immobilis – immobile (from in –<br />
mobilis – mobile); impotentia – impotence (from in – potentia – potency).<br />
<strong>The</strong> prefix in- followed by the consonants l and r changes into il- and ircorrespondingly,<br />
e. g.: illaesus – not damaged, without lesion (from in – laesus –<br />
hurt, damaged); irrationalis – irrational (from in – rationalis – rational).<br />
Latin prepositions are usually attached to Latin stems, and Greek ones are<br />
attached to Greek stems, e. g.: pertussis – whooping cough (from Latin per –<br />
throuhg, tussis – cough); anaemia – anaemia (from Greek an – neg., -aemia –<br />
blood).<br />
5
<strong>The</strong>re are exceptions to this rule, i. e. there are some cases when a Greek<br />
prefix is attached to the stem <strong>of</strong> a Latin word, and a Latin prefix is attached to the<br />
stem <strong>of</strong> a Greek word, e. g.; endocervicalis – endocervical (from Greek prefix<br />
endo- and Latin word cervicalis); intrathoracalis – intrathoracic (from Latin prefix<br />
intra- and Greek word thoracalis).<br />
GREEK PREFIXES<br />
Greek<br />
prefix<br />
Meaning<br />
Examples<br />
a-, anamphianaantiapo-<br />
negative prefix<br />
on both sides;<br />
around or about;<br />
double<br />
upward, excessive,<br />
or again<br />
effective against,<br />
opposing, or<br />
opposite, counter<br />
acting<br />
apathia apathy — lack <strong>of</strong> feeling or emotion,<br />
indifference<br />
amphiarthrosis amphiarthrosis — a form <strong>of</strong><br />
articulation permitting little motion, the apposed<br />
surfaces <strong>of</strong> bone being connected by fibrocartilage<br />
anaphoria anaphoria — a tendency for the visual<br />
axes <strong>of</strong> both eyes to divert above the horizontal<br />
plane<br />
anamnesis anamnesis — recollection<br />
antirabicus — for rabies<br />
antidiuresis antidiuresis — suppression <strong>of</strong> urinary<br />
excretion<br />
separation or<br />
derivation from<br />
apophysis apophysis — any outgrowth or<br />
swelling, especially a bony outgrowth that has<br />
6
dia-<br />
dys-<br />
ec-, ecto-<br />
through, apart,<br />
between, across or<br />
completely<br />
bad, improper,<br />
disordered,<br />
abnormal<br />
never been entirely separated from the bone <strong>of</strong><br />
which it forms a part, such as a process, tubercle,<br />
or tuberosity<br />
apoplexia apoplexy: 1. sudden neurologic<br />
impairment due to a cerebrovascular disorder,<br />
either an arterial occlusion or an intracranial<br />
haemorrhage. 2. copious extravasation <strong>of</strong> blood<br />
within any organ.<br />
diaphoresis diaphoresis — perspiration, especially<br />
pr<strong>of</strong>use perspiration<br />
diagnosis diagnosis: 1. the determination <strong>of</strong> the<br />
nature <strong>of</strong> a case <strong>of</strong> disease. 2. the art <strong>of</strong><br />
distinguishing one disease from another<br />
en-<br />
ex, exo-<br />
outside, or<br />
situated on the<br />
outside<br />
in, on<br />
dysphagia dysphagia - difficulty in swallowing<br />
ectomia ectomy — excision <strong>of</strong> an organ or part<br />
ectoderma ectoderm - the outermost layer <strong>of</strong> cells<br />
<strong>of</strong> the three primary germ layers <strong>of</strong> the embryo<br />
endo-<br />
out <strong>of</strong>, outside,<br />
away from<br />
encephalon encephalon — the brain: that part <strong>of</strong><br />
the central nervous system, contained within the<br />
cranium<br />
enuresis enuresis — involuntary discharge<br />
<strong>of</strong> urine<br />
epi-<br />
inside, inward<br />
situation, within<br />
exanthema exanthem - a skin eruption or rash<br />
exogenes exogenous — developed or originating<br />
7
outside the organism, as exogenous disease<br />
eu-<br />
hemi-<br />
hyper-<br />
upon, above,<br />
beside<br />
well, easily, good<br />
one half<br />
endogenus endogenous: 1. growing from<br />
within. 2. developing or originating within<br />
the organism, or arising from causes within<br />
the organism<br />
epicondylus epicondylus — a general term for an<br />
eminence upon a bone, above its condyle<br />
epithelium epithelium — the covering <strong>of</strong> internal<br />
and external surfaces <strong>of</strong> the body, including the<br />
lining <strong>of</strong> vessels and other small cavities<br />
hypo-<br />
eupnoe eupnea — easy or normal respiration<br />
mesometaparaperi-<br />
above, beyond,<br />
more than normal,<br />
or excessive<br />
beneath, under,<br />
below normal, or<br />
deficient<br />
in the middle,<br />
intermediate, or<br />
moderate<br />
change,<br />
transformation, or<br />
exchange<br />
hemispherium hemispherium - a general<br />
term denoting half <strong>of</strong> a spherical or spheroid<br />
structure<br />
hemiplegia hemiplegia — paralysis <strong>of</strong> one side <strong>of</strong><br />
the body<br />
hypernephroma hypernephroma — renal cell<br />
carcinoma<br />
hypogastrium hypogastrium alternative for<br />
regio pubica<br />
hypostasis hypostasis — poor or stagnant<br />
circulation in a dependent part <strong>of</strong> the body or<br />
organ, as in venous insufficiency<br />
8
pro-<br />
syn-,<br />
sym-<br />
a) beside, near<br />
b) abnormal<br />
around<br />
precursor<br />
union<br />
association<br />
or<br />
mesothelium mesothelium — the layer <strong>of</strong> flat<br />
cells, derived from the mesoderm, which<br />
lines the coelom or body cavity <strong>of</strong> the embryo<br />
metastasis metastasis — the transfer <strong>of</strong> disease<br />
from one organ or part to another not directly<br />
connected with it<br />
parotis — parotid gland<br />
paratriehosis — the growth <strong>of</strong> hair in an unusual<br />
place<br />
perigastritis perigastritis — the<br />
inflammation <strong>of</strong> the peritoneal coat <strong>of</strong> the stomach<br />
prophylaxis prophylaxis — the prevention<br />
<strong>of</strong> disease; preventive treatment<br />
progeria progeria — a syndrome <strong>of</strong> uncertain<br />
genetic inheritance, characterized by precocious<br />
senility <strong>of</strong> striking degree, with death from<br />
coronary artery disease requently<br />
occurring before 10 years <strong>of</strong> age<br />
syndactylia syndactyly - the most common<br />
congenital anomaly <strong>of</strong> the hand or foot, marked by<br />
persistence <strong>of</strong> the webbing between adjacent<br />
digits, so they are more or less completely attached<br />
symblepharon symblepharon — an adhesion<br />
9
etween the tarsal conjunctiva and the bulbar<br />
conjunctiva<br />
THE GREEK ALPHABET<br />
Greek letters <strong>The</strong> name <strong>of</strong> the letter Latin transcription<br />
Α α<br />
Β β<br />
Γ γ<br />
Δ δ<br />
Ε ε<br />
Ζ ζ<br />
Η η<br />
Θ θ<br />
Ι ι<br />
Κ κ<br />
Λ λ<br />
Μ μ<br />
Ν ν<br />
Ξ ξ<br />
Ο ο<br />
Π π<br />
Ρ ρ<br />
Σ σ ς<br />
Τ τ<br />
Υ υ<br />
Φ φ<br />
Χ χ<br />
Ψ ψ<br />
alpha<br />
beta<br />
gamma<br />
delta<br />
epsilon<br />
dzeta<br />
eta<br />
theta<br />
iota<br />
kappa<br />
lambda<br />
my<br />
ny<br />
xi<br />
omicron<br />
pi<br />
rho<br />
sigma<br />
tau<br />
ypsilon<br />
phi<br />
chi<br />
psi<br />
a<br />
b<br />
g<br />
d<br />
e (short)<br />
z<br />
e (long)<br />
th<br />
i<br />
c, k<br />
l<br />
m<br />
n<br />
x<br />
o (short)<br />
p<br />
r<br />
s<br />
t<br />
y<br />
ph<br />
ch<br />
ps<br />
10
Ω ω omega o (long)<br />
In the Old Greek alphabet there are 24 letters. <strong>The</strong> vowels: ε, η, ι, o, υ, ω, the<br />
rest are consonants.<br />
Writing and pronunciation <strong>of</strong> the Greek letters<br />
1. Sigma has two graphic signs: σ – in the beginning and in the middle <strong>of</strong> a<br />
word;<br />
ς – in the end <strong>of</strong> a word.<br />
2. Gamma (γ) is pronounced as English [g].<br />
Gamma is pronounced as English [n] before λ, χ, κ, ξ.<br />
<strong>The</strong> Greek diphthongs<br />
<strong>The</strong> diphthongs are pronounced as a single syllable. All <strong>of</strong> them are long by<br />
nature.<br />
Greek diphthong Latin writing<br />
αι<br />
ae<br />
ει<br />
i<br />
oι<br />
oe<br />
oυ<br />
u<br />
αυ<br />
au<br />
ευ<br />
eu<br />
<strong>The</strong> aboveline signs<br />
Greek words which are beginning with a vowel, a diphthong or “ρ” have a<br />
spirit (spiritus).<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are two kinds <strong>of</strong> a spirit: thick and thin.<br />
11
<strong>The</strong> thick spirit (spiritus asper) is designated by the sign (‛) above the<br />
beginning vowel.<br />
<strong>The</strong> thin spirit (spiritus lenis) is designated by the sign (’) above the<br />
beginning vowel. This sign doesn’t influence its pronunciation.<br />
<strong>The</strong> sign <strong>of</strong> a spirit is put also above “ρ” in the beginning <strong>of</strong> a word but it<br />
doesn’t influence its pronunciation.<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the terms into English,<br />
memorize the spelling:<br />
Anatomical terms<br />
Histological terms<br />
anastomosis<br />
aponeurosis<br />
apophysis<br />
(vena) azygos<br />
epigastrium<br />
hypoglossus<br />
metaphysis<br />
perichondrium<br />
synistosis<br />
symphysis<br />
anaphasis<br />
metaphasis<br />
prophasis<br />
endothelium<br />
mesothelium<br />
epithelium<br />
endomysium<br />
perimysium<br />
synapsis<br />
parametrium<br />
Clinical terms<br />
diarrhoea, dyspnoё, hemianaesthesia, endometritis, parametritis, perimetritis,<br />
hypoglykaemia, hypertrophia, apodia, prognosis.<br />
12
Pharmaceutical terms<br />
Anaesthesinum; anhydricus, a, um; antacidus, a, um; antidotum<br />
physiologicum; diaphoreticus, a, um; Euphyllinum; Parathyreoidinum;<br />
Synoestrolum; syntheticus, a, um.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
<strong>The</strong> English prefix “around” corresponds to the Greek prefix:<br />
a) metab)<br />
hypoc)<br />
perid)<br />
endoe)<br />
ana-<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Which Greek prefix corresponds to the English prefix “above”:<br />
a) hemib)<br />
apoc)<br />
epid)<br />
diae)<br />
anti-<br />
Test № 3.<br />
13
Determine the terms with prefixes which have the meaning:<br />
a) covering membrane <strong>of</strong> an organ<br />
b) inner membrane <strong>of</strong> an organ<br />
c) cellular tissue around an organ<br />
1) endophlebitis; 2) paratyphlitis; 3) periosteum; 4) endometrium; 5)<br />
periodontium; 6) endothelium; 7) paranephritis; 8) endocardium; 9) parodontium;<br />
10) peritonaeum.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
14
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language.<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology.<br />
Clinical terminology.<br />
<strong>The</strong> formation <strong>of</strong> terms-composites with the<br />
given morphemes and terms-elements.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> modern clinical terminology has been being formed during many<br />
centuries, being developed and perfected in all its components.<br />
Clinical terms are mainly formed by the way <strong>of</strong> joining <strong>of</strong> several<br />
components. <strong>The</strong> components <strong>of</strong> the compound terms which have a constant, steady<br />
meaning and form several terms <strong>of</strong> the same contents line are called termselements.<br />
In order to understand and consciously use the scientific clinical terminology<br />
it is necessary to memorize the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin words and the Greek<br />
word-forming elements.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1) To know what languages are used in medical naming.<br />
2) To know the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms.<br />
3) To know what clinical terms are by position.<br />
4) To know how terms-elements are joined into terms.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Anatomy, histology<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
3
Clinical term<br />
Affixation<br />
Word combination<br />
Term-element<br />
A compound word formed by the joining <strong>of</strong> two or<br />
more word-forming elements derived from Greek on<br />
the whole.<br />
Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />
Joining <strong>of</strong> two or more stems to form a new word.<br />
A steady element <strong>of</strong> a compound word which has<br />
constant meaning and can form several terms.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What languages are used in medical naming?<br />
2. What is the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms?<br />
3. What are clinical terms by position?<br />
4. How are terms-elements joined into terms?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Task № 1<br />
Form the terms with the known meanings:<br />
a) leuk- (white):<br />
white blood cell, lack <strong>of</strong> leucocytes, treatment with leucocytes, white<br />
blood, bleeding in the patients with leucosis;<br />
b) mega-, megal- (large):<br />
large eyes, large tongue, mania <strong>of</strong> greatness, increase <strong>of</strong> the large part <strong>of</strong><br />
the brain;<br />
c) erythr- (red):<br />
red blood cell, red colouring <strong>of</strong> the urine, vision <strong>of</strong> objects in red<br />
colouring, germ <strong>of</strong> the red blood cell, swallowing <strong>of</strong> erythrocytes.<br />
4
Task № 2.<br />
Form the terms <strong>of</strong> the given terms-elements:<br />
I. 1) odont(o) – (-algia, -rrhagia, -ectomia, -necrosis, -genes, -lithus);<br />
2) angi(o) – (-spasmus, -sclerosis, -paresis, -pathia, -necrosis, -tomia).<br />
II. 1) -sclerosis (arthr-, angi-, chondr-, ten-, pyel-);<br />
2) -mycosis (haemat-, stomat-, enter-, bronch-, colp-).<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong>re are two basic ways <strong>of</strong> forming new words in Latin:<br />
1. Affixation (adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem). <strong>The</strong> words formed by<br />
affixation are called derived words.<br />
2. Word combination (when two or more stems go together to form a new<br />
word). <strong>The</strong> words formed this way are called compound ones.<br />
Latin words are joined by the vowels -i- and -o-, e. g.: mult-i-cellularis<br />
(multicellular); sacr-o-lumbalis (sacrolumbar); cerebr-o-spinalis (cerebrospinal).<br />
Greek words are joined by the vowel -o-, e. g.: arthr-o-pathia (the disease <strong>of</strong><br />
joints). When the second word begins with a vowel, then -o- is <strong>of</strong>ten dropped, e. g.:<br />
neuralgia (neuralgia); adenectomia (adenectomy).<br />
<strong>The</strong> stems <strong>of</strong> the words in Gen. sing. are most frequently used to form<br />
compound and derived words, e. g.: dermatitis (from derma, dermat-is (skin))<br />
means inflammation <strong>of</strong> the skin, dermatologia is the science about skin diseases.<br />
Sometimes the stem <strong>of</strong> the word in Nom. sing. (the so-called pseudostem) is<br />
used for better pronunciation, e. g.: py-o-derm-ia (purulent inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
skin); epi-derm-is (epidermis).<br />
In a compound noun an attribute usually comes first whereas the head word is<br />
the final element (it is called a word termination or a term-element), e. g.:<br />
5
dermatologia (derma, atis – skin; logia – science) is the science which studies skin<br />
diseases.<br />
A term-element is a steady element <strong>of</strong> a compound word. It has constant<br />
meaning and can form several terms, e, g.: the term-element – algia denotes the<br />
pain <strong>of</strong> inorganic origin, e. g.:<br />
gastralgia (stomachache); odontalgia (toothache); myalgia (pain in the<br />
muscles), etc.<br />
As far as clinical terms are formed mainly by the old Greek language, the<br />
students should learn Greek stems and other combining forms <strong>of</strong> the Latin words,<br />
including word terminations.<br />
Clinical terminology is one <strong>of</strong> the most difficult subsystems <strong>of</strong> the medical<br />
terminology. It includes both the names <strong>of</strong> diseases or pathologic processes and the<br />
ways <strong>of</strong> their examination and treatment.<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task №1.<br />
Make up the terms <strong>of</strong> the given terms-elements:<br />
I. 1) gloss (o) – (-algia, -ectomia, -pathia, -plegia, -scopia)<br />
2) myel (o) – (-cele, -graphia, -pathia, -odynia)<br />
3) phleb (o) – (-logia, -graphia, -rrhaphia, -rrhogia, -ectasia)<br />
II. 1) –tomia (phleb-, cholecyst-, tonsilt-, spondyl-, blephar-)<br />
2) –logia (bio-, phyt-, cyt-, aeti-, hist-)<br />
3) –algia (mast-, cyst-, aden-, blephar-, cholecyst-)<br />
Task №2.<br />
6
Form the terms with the known meaning:<br />
a) encephal- (brain):<br />
stone in the brain, bleeding from the brain, brain hernia, s<strong>of</strong>tening <strong>of</strong><br />
the brain, headache;<br />
b) neur- (nerve):<br />
cutting <strong>of</strong> the nerve, putting stitches on the nerve, extraction <strong>of</strong> the<br />
nerve, germ <strong>of</strong> the nerve cell;<br />
c) ophthalm- (eye):<br />
pain in the eye, disease <strong>of</strong> the eyes, paralysis <strong>of</strong> the eye muscles,<br />
leaking from the eye;<br />
d) enter- (intestine):<br />
science <strong>of</strong> the intestines, fixation <strong>of</strong> the intestine, transplantation <strong>of</strong><br />
intestines, spasm <strong>of</strong> the intestine, artificial opening in the intestine;<br />
e) my- (muscle):<br />
knowledge <strong>of</strong> muscles, muscle pain, muscle spasm, disease <strong>of</strong> muscles,<br />
cutting <strong>of</strong> the muscle;<br />
f) gastr- (stomach):<br />
extraction <strong>of</strong> the stomach, stomach bleeding, extraction <strong>of</strong> the stomach<br />
and duodenum, stomach leaking.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
Find the Latin term corresponding to the English one “vision <strong>of</strong> subjects in<br />
the yellow colour”:<br />
a) cyanopsia;<br />
b) erythropsia;<br />
c) macropsia;<br />
d) xanthopsia.<br />
7
Test № 2.<br />
Find the Latin term corresponding to the English one “lowering <strong>of</strong> the pain<br />
sense”:<br />
a) hyperalgesia;<br />
b) hypalgesia;<br />
c) analgesia;<br />
d) anaesthesia.<br />
Test № 3.<br />
Find the English term corresponding to the Latin one “myopathia”:<br />
a) disease <strong>of</strong> the spinal cord;<br />
b) progressing muscle dystrophy;<br />
c) neurastheny <strong>of</strong> the spinal cord.<br />
Test № 4.<br />
Find the English term corresponding to the Latin one “pneumectomia”:<br />
a) cutting <strong>of</strong> the lung;<br />
b) excision <strong>of</strong> the lung;<br />
c) breaking <strong>of</strong> the lung.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
8
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
9
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />
Latin language.<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />
studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />
clinical terminology.<br />
Clinical terminology.<br />
<strong>The</strong> formation <strong>of</strong> terms-names <strong>of</strong> the<br />
inflammatory, uninflammatory and tumour<br />
diseases.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
Affixation is adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem. It is one <strong>of</strong> the main<br />
ways <strong>of</strong> forming new words in Latin.<br />
In order to form the clinical terms – the names <strong>of</strong> the inflammatory,<br />
uninflammatory and tumour diseases, the corresponding suffixes are used. <strong>The</strong><br />
students must know these suffixes, their meaning and the rules <strong>of</strong> adding them to<br />
the stem. This knowledge together with practical skills and habits <strong>of</strong> forming<br />
clinical terms helps the students to master clinical terminology.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1) To know what affixation is.<br />
2) To know the suffixes used to form the terms-names <strong>of</strong> the inflammatory,<br />
uninflammatory and tumour diseases.<br />
3) To know how to add the suffixes to the stems.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />
Anatomy, histology<br />
<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Afixation<br />
Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />
3
Suffix<br />
A word-forming morpheme, a part <strong>of</strong> a word<br />
between a root and an ending.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What is affixation?<br />
2. What are the suffixes used to form the terms-names <strong>of</strong> the inflammatory,<br />
uninflammatory and tumour diseases?<br />
3. How are the suffixes added to the stems?<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Form the terms with the help <strong>of</strong> the suffixes, translate into Latin:<br />
1. -itis, itidis f: inflammation <strong>of</strong>: the tongue, the mucous membrane <strong>of</strong> the<br />
mouth cavity, the brain, the tear gland, the blind gut, the calix and<br />
bladder, the tooth pulp, the ear, the intestine, the stomach.<br />
2. -osis, is f: uninflammatory disease: excessive pigmentation <strong>of</strong> the skin,<br />
functional disorder <strong>of</strong> the nervous system, disease <strong>of</strong> vertebrae,<br />
narrowing, poisoning, temporary increase <strong>of</strong> leukocyte number in<br />
the blood, hypertrophy <strong>of</strong> the thyroid gland, increase <strong>of</strong> thrombocyte<br />
number.<br />
3. -iasis, is f: uninflammatory disease: stone disease, bladder stone disease ,<br />
gallbladder stone disease, kidney stone disease, tooth stone disease,<br />
ear stone disease, vein stone disease.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
4
In Latin clinical terminology the following suffixes meaning the names <strong>of</strong> the<br />
inflammatory, uninflammatory and tumour diseases are used:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> suffix -it-is (Gen. sing. -itid-is) is a word termination denoting<br />
inflammation <strong>of</strong> the part indicated by the word stem to which it is attached. E. g.:<br />
Latin noun<br />
Stem <strong>of</strong> the Greek<br />
noun<br />
Examples<br />
articulatio, onis f<br />
glandula, ae f<br />
vas, vasis n<br />
auris, is f<br />
oculus, i m<br />
ren, renis m<br />
vena, ae f<br />
gaster, gastris f<br />
arthradenangiotophthalmnephrphlebgastr-<br />
arthritis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong><br />
joints)<br />
adenitis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> a<br />
gland or lymphatic node)<br />
angiitis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
walls <strong>of</strong> blood vessels)<br />
otitis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> the ear)<br />
ophthalmitis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong><br />
the eye or <strong>of</strong> the conjunctiva or deeper<br />
structures <strong>of</strong> the eye)<br />
nephritis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
kidney)<br />
phlebitis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
vein)<br />
gastritis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
stomach)<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> suffix -os-is is a word termination denoting a process, especially a<br />
disease or morbid process, and sometimes conveying the meaning <strong>of</strong> abnormal<br />
increase. <strong>The</strong> suffix is added either to the stem <strong>of</strong> a Greek or Latin noun. E. g.:<br />
5
Latin noun<br />
Stem <strong>of</strong> the Greek<br />
noun<br />
Examples<br />
articulatio, onis f<br />
ren, renis m<br />
fungus, i m<br />
arthr-<br />
nephr-<br />
myc-<br />
arthrosis, is f (a disease <strong>of</strong> a joint)<br />
nephrosis, is f (any disease <strong>of</strong> the<br />
kidneys<br />
characterized by purely degenerative<br />
lesions<br />
<strong>of</strong> the renal tubules)<br />
mycosis, is f (a fungoid disease)<br />
3. <strong>The</strong> suffix -ias-is is a word termination meaning the process or the<br />
condition resulting therefrom, particularly <strong>of</strong> a morbid condition. It is usually<br />
attached to the stem <strong>of</strong> a Greek noun. E. g.:<br />
psoriasis, is f psoriasis (from the Greek psoriasis psoriasis) – a common<br />
chronic, squamous dermatosis with polygenic inheritance and a fluctuating course;<br />
leontiasis, is f leontiasis (from the Greek leon, leontos (lion) leontiasis) –<br />
the leonine face <strong>of</strong> lepromatous leprosy, due to nodular invasion <strong>of</strong> the<br />
subcutaneous tissue <strong>of</strong> the face, giving it a vaguely leonine appearance;<br />
trichiasis, is f trichiasis (from the Greek trix, trichos (hair) trichiasis) – 1)<br />
a condition <strong>of</strong> ingrowing hairs about an orifice, or <strong>of</strong> ingrowing eyelashes; 2) the<br />
appearance <strong>of</strong> hairlike filaments in the urine.<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> suffix -oma means a tumour. All nouns with the suffix -oma are<br />
neuter. E.g.:<br />
adenoma, atis n – adenoma, tumour (a benign epithelial tumour in which the<br />
cells form recognizable glandular structures or in which the cells are clearly derived<br />
from glandular epithelium (from Greek aden, adenis m gland);<br />
6
fibroma, atis n – fibroma (a tumour composed mainly <strong>of</strong> fibrous or fully<br />
developed connective tissue, called also fibroid and fibroid tumour (from Latin<br />
fibra, ae f fiber)).<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1.<br />
Form the terms with the suffixoma, explain their meaning:<br />
1. Derma, dermat-. 2. Hepar, hepat-. 3. Mys, my-. 4. Fibra, fibr-. 5. Chondros,<br />
chondr-. 6. Neuron, neur-. 7. Lipos, lip-. 8. Odus, odont-. 9. Sarx, sarc-. 10.<br />
Ganglion, gangli-. 11. Sialon, sial-. 12. Lymph-. 13. Pleur-. 14. Papill-. 15. Oste-.<br />
Task № 2.<br />
Find the suffixes which have the meaning:<br />
a) inflammatory diseases; b) tumours; c) uninflammatory diseases.<br />
1. Pulpitis. 2. Leontiasis. 3. Acidosis. 4. Spodylosis. 5. Keratoma. 6.<br />
Myosarcoma. 7. Periostitis. 8. Osteosis. 9. Mycosis. 10. Cholelithiasis. 11. Parotitis.<br />
12. Leucocytosis. 13. Lymphoma. 14. Arthritis. 15. Melanosis. 16. Psychosis. 17.<br />
Meningioma. 18. Elephantiasis. 19. Mastosis. 20. Laryngitis. 21. Urolithiasis. 22.<br />
Kyphosis. 23. Encephalosis. 24. Stomatitis. 25. Hepatosis.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1.<br />
7
organ:<br />
Choose the term in which the suffix means the inflammatory process in the<br />
a) arthrosis;<br />
b) arthralgia;<br />
c) arthropathia;<br />
d) arthritis;<br />
e) arthrodynia.<br />
Test № 2.<br />
Choose the term in which the suffix means the tumour:<br />
a) nephrosis;<br />
b) nephritis;<br />
c) nephroma;<br />
d) nephropexia;<br />
e) nephropathia.<br />
Test № 3.<br />
Choose the term in which the suffix means the uninflammatory disease:<br />
a) osteoma;<br />
b) ostitis;<br />
c) osteotomia;<br />
d) osteosis;<br />
e) osteopathia.<br />
Test № 4.<br />
8
Find the term corresponding to the meaning “inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />
periosteum”:<br />
a) periodontitis;<br />
b) periostitis;<br />
c) periostosis;<br />
d) parodontitis.<br />
Test № 5.<br />
Find the English term corresponding to the Latin one “pyelonephritis”:<br />
a) inflammation <strong>of</strong> the calix and bladder;<br />
b) inflammation <strong>of</strong> the calix and kidney;<br />
c) purulent inflammation <strong>of</strong> the kidneys.<br />
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
9
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content module № 3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language.<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying<br />
<strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> clinical<br />
terminology.<br />
Clinical terminology.<br />
<strong>The</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> some diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the basic<br />
sections <strong>of</strong> medicine: therapy, surgery, nervous<br />
diseases, haematology, stomatology and others<br />
into Latin. <strong>The</strong> current content control.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
To know how to diagnose the case is very important for a doctor.<br />
While being acquainted with some diagnoses and training in the translation <strong>of</strong><br />
some diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the basic sections <strong>of</strong> medicine the students learn to use Latin<br />
clinical terminology.This will be helpful in their future practice.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1) To know what a diagnosis is.<br />
2) To know the common clinical terms used in diagnoses.<br />
3) To know how to translate some diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the basic sections <strong>of</strong> medicine.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines <strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
Anatomy, histology<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Definition<br />
Diagnosis<br />
<strong>The</strong> determination <strong>of</strong> a disease on the grounds <strong>of</strong> a<br />
patient’s examination.<br />
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. What is a diagnosis?<br />
2. Name some common clinical terms used in diagnoses.<br />
3. Translate some diagnoses from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
3
Write down and memorize the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> every word, translate the<br />
clinical diagnoses into English:<br />
1. Oedema haemorrhagicum membrorum. 2. Necrosis hepatis toxica. 3. Asthma<br />
bronchiale, forma infectiosoallergica. 4. Bronchitis endogena toxica cum<br />
syndromo obstructivo manifesto, cursus gravis. 5. Insufficientia renalis. 6. Hernia<br />
umbilicalis incarcerata. 7. Aneurysma parietis anterioris ventriculi sinistri<br />
acutum. 8. Abscessus lobi superioris pulmonis dextri acutus. 9. Phlebectasia<br />
membrorum inferiorum. 10. Tuberculosis lobi superioris pulmonis dextri focalis.<br />
<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
While being acquainted with some diagnoses and training in the translation <strong>of</strong><br />
some diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the basic sections <strong>of</strong> medicine: therapy, surgery, nervous<br />
diseases, haematology, stomatology and others from Latin into English and from<br />
English into Latin, the students learn to use Latin clinical terminology.<br />
A lot <strong>of</strong> clinical terms (names <strong>of</strong> diseases, pathological processes, methods <strong>of</strong><br />
investigation and treatment etc.) are compound words formed by the joining <strong>of</strong> two<br />
or more word-forming elements derived from Greek on the whole. By their position<br />
terms-elements may be initial (standing in the beginning <strong>of</strong> a word), intermediate<br />
(in the middle <strong>of</strong> a word), finite (in the end <strong>of</strong> a word). E. g.:<br />
hyper-glyk-aemia (the heightened content <strong>of</strong> sugar in the blood);<br />
chole-cyst-itis (the inflammation <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder).<br />
<strong>The</strong>se clinical terms are used in making the diagnoses.<br />
<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />
1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />
Task № 1<br />
Write down and memorize the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> every word, translate the<br />
clinical diagnoses into Latin:<br />
1. Emphysema <strong>of</strong> lungs, respiratory insufficiency, stage I. 2. Thrombosis <strong>of</strong><br />
the central vein <strong>of</strong> retina. 3. Cutaneous edema with necrosis. 4. Penetrating ulcer. 5.<br />
Fulminant hepatitis. 6. Trembling palsy. 7. Recurrent endomyocarditis. 8.<br />
4
Myocardial infarction <strong>of</strong> the anterior wall <strong>of</strong> the left ventricle. 9. Cirrhotic<br />
tuberculosis <strong>of</strong> the upper lobe <strong>of</strong> the left lung. 10. Paresis <strong>of</strong> the lower limbs.<br />
Task № 2<br />
Traslate into English the record <strong>of</strong> the post-mortem examination:<br />
Endocarditis chronica fibrosa valvulae mitralis. Vitium cordis. Stenosis et<br />
insufficientia valvulae mitralis. Hypertrophia et dilatio cordis. Cirrhosis hepatis.<br />
Ascites. Anasarca. Arteriosclerosis generalisata.Cicatrices myocardii.<br />
Nephrocirrhosis arteriosclerotica. Emphysema pulmonum senile.<br />
B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />
Test № 1<br />
Choose the diagnosis with the meaning “pulmonary tuberculosis”:<br />
a) abscessus pulmonum;<br />
b) infiltratio pulmonum tuberculosa;<br />
c) phthisis pulmonum.<br />
Test № 2<br />
Choose the second part <strong>of</strong> the clinical term corresponding by sense:<br />
1. diabetes; 2. otitis; 3. parotitis; 4. sclerosis; 5. rhinitis; 6. cirrhosis; 7.<br />
atrophia<br />
a) purulenta;<br />
b) allergica;<br />
c) splenogenes;<br />
d) myelopathica;<br />
e) mellitus;<br />
f) epidemica;<br />
g) disseminata<br />
Literature<br />
5
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
6
Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />
“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />
“Approved”<br />
at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />
with Latin language and<br />
medical terminology<br />
Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />
Docent _____________<br />
Sologor I.M.<br />
“____” ________200__<br />
Methodical Instructions<br />
for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />
during the training for the practical studies<br />
Academic discipline<br />
Module № 2<br />
Content modules №№ 1-3<br />
<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />
Latin language.<br />
Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying<br />
<strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”.<br />
Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> clinical<br />
terminology.<br />
1. Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
“Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> <strong>state</strong> pharmacopoeia.<br />
3. Clinical terminology.<br />
<strong>The</strong> summary module control.<br />
Year 1<br />
Department<br />
medical<br />
Poltava – 2008<br />
2
<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />
<strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> practical habits on the discipline “Latin language and medical<br />
terminology” includes the practical use <strong>of</strong> the rules <strong>of</strong> the prescription-writing in the<br />
translation and in solving the prescription tasks; the automatism in writing the<br />
names <strong>of</strong> the pharmaceutical preparations which contain the specialized<br />
pharmacological, therapeutic, chemical and other information; the automatism in<br />
the perception and written representation <strong>of</strong> the terms-composites <strong>of</strong> the Greek and<br />
Latin origin; the easy translation <strong>of</strong> the main clinical diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the principal<br />
medical branches – therapy, surgery, nervous diseases, stomatological diseases,<br />
gynaecology and others. <strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> summary module control”<br />
is in the checking <strong>of</strong> the quality <strong>of</strong> the knowledge, skills and habits acquired by<br />
students.<br />
2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />
1. To know how to use the verbs in the prescription form.<br />
2. To know what the chemical nomenclature is.<br />
3. To know what Latin names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements are.<br />
4. To know the kinds <strong>of</strong> acids, oxides and salts, the ways <strong>of</strong> forming their<br />
Latin names.<br />
5. To know how to translate the names <strong>of</strong> chemical compounds from Latin<br />
into English and on the contrary.<br />
6. To know the combining forms denoting the chemical structure <strong>of</strong> the drug<br />
preparation.<br />
7. To know the combining forms with therapeutic, anatomic, physiological<br />
and pharmacological meaning.<br />
8. To know how to distinguish different combining forms in the names <strong>of</strong><br />
medicinal preparations.<br />
9. To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> some botanical and pharmaceutical names <strong>of</strong><br />
medicinal plants in English.<br />
10. To know the definition and the structure <strong>of</strong> a prescription.<br />
3
11. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing.<br />
12. To know the additional inscriptions in prescriptions.<br />
13. To know the medicinal forms and the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing them out.<br />
14. To know the additional inscriptions in prescriptions.<br />
15. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> abbreviating in prescriptions.<br />
16. To know the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms.<br />
17. To know what clinical terms are by position.<br />
18. To know how terms-elements are joined into terms.<br />
19. To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used prefixes formed by Latin<br />
prepositions and particles.<br />
20. To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used Greek prefixes.<br />
21. To know the suffixes used to form the terms-names <strong>of</strong> the inflammatory,<br />
uninflammatory and tumour diseases.<br />
22. To know how to translate some diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the basic sections <strong>of</strong><br />
medicine.<br />
3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />
(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />
<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines <strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />
Russian language and English language<br />
School course <strong>of</strong> chemistry<br />
School course <strong>of</strong> botany<br />
<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a verb,<br />
the description <strong>of</strong> conjugations, the<br />
determination <strong>of</strong> the verb stem, the<br />
imperative mood.<br />
<strong>The</strong> Latin names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements,<br />
the structure <strong>of</strong> acids, oxides, salts and<br />
esters.<br />
Methods <strong>of</strong> classifying different kinds<br />
<strong>of</strong> plants. <strong>The</strong> basic knowledge <strong>of</strong><br />
generic and specific names <strong>of</strong> plants<br />
4
4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />
4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />
student should master while training for the studies.<br />
Term<br />
Person<br />
Number<br />
Tense<br />
Mood<br />
Voice<br />
Conjugation<br />
Chemical nomenclature<br />
Chemical element<br />
Acid<br />
Oxide<br />
Salt<br />
Ester<br />
Scientific (systemic) name<br />
Definition<br />
Who is the subject, i. e., who performs the action,<br />
from the speaker’s point <strong>of</strong> view.<br />
How many subjects, singular or plural.<br />
<strong>The</strong> time <strong>of</strong> action; Latin has six tenses.<br />
<strong>The</strong> manner <strong>of</strong> indicating the action or <strong>state</strong> <strong>of</strong> being<br />
<strong>of</strong> the verb; like English, Latin has the indicative<br />
(which “indicates” facts), the imperative (which<br />
orders actions), and the subjunctive (which describes,<br />
in particular, hypothetical or potential actions).<br />
An indication, with transitive verbs (those that can<br />
take direct objects), <strong>of</strong> whether the subject performs<br />
the action (the active voice) or receives it (passive).<br />
Latin verbs are divided into four conjugations.<br />
A classified system <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> chemical<br />
elements and compounds which are used as<br />
medicinal substances.<br />
<strong>The</strong> second declension neuter noun having the<br />
ending –um in Nom. sing.<br />
A chemical compound having a sour taste.<br />
Combination <strong>of</strong> elements <strong>of</strong> an average degree <strong>of</strong><br />
oxidation with oxygen.<br />
Compound substance, combination <strong>of</strong> alkali and acid<br />
in one.<br />
5
Trivial (agreed) name<br />
Prescription<br />
Dosage forms <strong>of</strong><br />
medications<br />
Solid, liquid, s<strong>of</strong>t<br />
Abbreviation<br />
Clinical term<br />
Affixation<br />
Word combination<br />
Word termination<br />
Prefix<br />
Suffix<br />
Word combination<br />
Term-element<br />
Organic combination containing oxygen.<br />
<strong>The</strong> composition and location <strong>of</strong> components<br />
corresponding to the composition and structure <strong>of</strong> a<br />
chemical compound’s molecule.<br />
Convenient for practical use because <strong>of</strong> its simple<br />
phonetic and grammar structure and short form.<br />
Prescription is an address <strong>of</strong> a doctor to a<br />
pharmaceutical chemist with the instructions in<br />
medicine-preparing and giving it to a patient.<br />
Final products administered to the patient.<br />
All the medications divided according to the<br />
consistence <strong>of</strong> ingredients.<br />
A conventional reduction <strong>of</strong> words while writing,<br />
and also a word composed by reduction <strong>of</strong> two or<br />
more words.<br />
A compound word formed by the joining <strong>of</strong> two or<br />
more word-forming elements derived from Greek on<br />
the whole.<br />
Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />
Joining <strong>of</strong> two or more stems to form a new word.<br />
A steady element <strong>of</strong> a compound word which has<br />
constant meaning and can form several terms.<br />
A part <strong>of</strong> a word, a morpheme, standing before a<br />
root.<br />
A word-forming morpheme, a part <strong>of</strong> a word<br />
between a root and an ending.<br />
Joining <strong>of</strong> two or more stems to form a new word.<br />
A steady element <strong>of</strong> a compound word which has<br />
constant meaning and can form several terms.<br />
6
4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />
1. How many conjugations are Latin verbs divided into?<br />
2. How is the conjugation determined?<br />
3. How is the singular imperative formed?<br />
4. How is the plural imperative formed?<br />
5. What does chemical nomenclature include?<br />
6. What are the names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements?<br />
7. How are the names <strong>of</strong> acids, oxides and salts formed?<br />
8. What combining forms denote the chemical structure <strong>of</strong> the drug<br />
preparation?<br />
9. Name the combining forms with therapeutic, anatomic, physiological and<br />
pharmacological meaning.<br />
10. What is a prescription?<br />
11. How many parts does a prescription consist <strong>of</strong>? Characterize each <strong>of</strong><br />
them.<br />
12. What are the rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing?<br />
13. What are the additional inscriptions in prescriptions?<br />
14. What medicinal forms belong to solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t ones?<br />
15. What is an abbreviation? What are the rules <strong>of</strong> abbreviating in<br />
prescriptions?<br />
16. What is the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms?<br />
17. What are clinical terms by position?<br />
18. How are terms-elements joined into terms?<br />
19. What is the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used prefixes formed by Latin<br />
prepositions and particles?<br />
20. What is the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used Greek prefixes?<br />
21. What suffixes are used to form the terms-names <strong>of</strong> the inflammatory,<br />
uninflammatory and tumour diseases?<br />
22. Name some common clinical terms used in diagnoses.<br />
7
4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />
Test tasks for total module control on Latin language and medical terminology<br />
(Module 2)<br />
“Lexico-syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the topic “Pharmaceutical terminology”.<br />
Lexical and analytico-syntactical studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Clinical terminology”.<br />
Task 1 (5 marks). Determine the conjugation <strong>of</strong> the verbs:<br />
1) habere; 2) audire; 3) sterilisare; 4) signare; 5) miscere; 6) servare; 7)<br />
vertere; 8) dare; 9) recipere; 10) repetere.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
a) I; b) II; c) III; d) IV.<br />
Task 2 (5 marks). Choose the numbers <strong>of</strong> the verbs given in Task 1 which<br />
form Plural imperative with the help <strong>of</strong> the suffixes:<br />
a) -te; b) -ĭte.<br />
Task 3 (1 mark). <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements in Latin are:<br />
a) masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension;<br />
b) neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension;<br />
c) feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 1-st declension.<br />
Task 4 (1 mark). <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> acids with high degree <strong>of</strong> oxidation are made<br />
up with the help <strong>of</strong> the suffix:<br />
a) -os-; b) -ic-; c) -ul-; d) -id-.<br />
Task 5 (1 mark). <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> oxygenless acids are formed with the help <strong>of</strong><br />
the component:<br />
a) hyper-; b) hyp(o)-; c) hydr(o)-; d) hygr(o)-.<br />
8
prefix:<br />
Task 6 (1 marks). <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> basic salts are formed with the help <strong>of</strong> the<br />
a) super-; b) sub-; c) supra-; d) ultra-.<br />
Task 7 (1 mark). A prescription consists <strong>of</strong>:<br />
a) 6 parts; b) 9 parts; c) 10 parts.<br />
Task 8 (5 marks). Choose the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin names:<br />
1) Chelidonium; 2) Absinthium; 3) Digitalis; 4) Chamomilla; 5) Glycyrrhiza;<br />
6) Mentha piperita; 7) Foeniculum; 8) Filix mas; 9) Hypericum; 10) Urtica.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
a) liquorice f) wormwood<br />
b) celadine g) pepper-mint<br />
c) St. John’s wort h) foxglove<br />
d) male fern i) camomile<br />
e) nettle j) fennel<br />
Task 9 (4 marks). Choose the prescription variant <strong>of</strong> the compounds’ names:<br />
1. a) spiritus aethylicus; 2. a) sulfur praecipitatum;<br />
b) spiritus aethylici; b) sulfuri praecipitato;<br />
c) spiritum aethylicum; c) sulfuris praecipitati;<br />
3. a) solutionis Iodi spirituosae; 4. a) aqua Menthae;<br />
b) solutio Iodi spirituosa; b) aquae Menthae;<br />
c) solutiones Iodi spirituosae; c) aquam Menthae;<br />
Task 10 (5 marks). Determine the names <strong>of</strong> anions:<br />
1) sulfas; 2) hydroiodidum; 3) mitris; 4) sulfidum; 5) arsenas; 6)<br />
hydrochloridum; 7) sulfis; 8) iodidum; 9) nitras; 10) hydrobromidum.<br />
9
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
a) salts <strong>of</strong> acids with larger content <strong>of</strong> oxygen;<br />
b) salts <strong>of</strong> acids with smaller content <strong>of</strong> oxygen;<br />
c) salts <strong>of</strong> oxygenless acids;<br />
d) salts <strong>of</strong> oxygenless acids with organic base.<br />
Task 11 (5 marks). Determine the types <strong>of</strong> chemical compounds:<br />
1) acidum sulfuricum; 2) Argenti sulfas; 3) Hydrogenii peroxydum; 4)<br />
Hydrargyri cyanidum; 5) Calcii chloridum; 6) Benzylpenicillinum-natrium; 7)<br />
Aethylmorphini hydrochloridum; 8) Plumbi oxydum; 9) acidum hydrochloricum;<br />
10) Natrii benzoas.<br />
Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />
a) acids<br />
b) salts<br />
c) oxides<br />
Task 12 (5 marks). Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />
1) remedium (cardinalis, e)<br />
2) pulvis (subtilis, e)<br />
3) aqua (destillatus, a, um)<br />
4) succus (naturalis, e)<br />
5) capsula (gelatinosus, a, um)<br />
6) vitrum (fuscus, a, um)<br />
7) extractum (spissus a, um)<br />
8) sirupus (simplex, icis)<br />
9) solutio (spirituosus, a, um)<br />
10) acidum (boricus, a, um)<br />
Task 13 (1 mark). <strong>The</strong> term “pyelocystitis” means the inflammation <strong>of</strong>:<br />
a) calix and kidney;<br />
10
) gall-bladder;<br />
c) calix and bladder;<br />
d) urino-genital system.<br />
Task 14 (5 marks). Add the second part <strong>of</strong> the term according to the meaning:<br />
1) oto… (fungoid disease <strong>of</strong> the ear); 2) xero… (dry lips); 3) teno… (release<br />
<strong>of</strong> the tendon from scars); 4) haemo… (treatment with the blood); 5) nephro…<br />
(kidney bleeding).<br />
Task 15 (5 marks). Add the first part <strong>of</strong> the term according to the meaning:<br />
1) …ectasia (vein dilation); 2) …pathia (disease <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder); 3)<br />
…therapia (theatment with plants); 4) …pexia (fixation <strong>of</strong> the intestine); 5) …cele<br />
(brain hernia).<br />
Task 16 (5 marks). Choose the Greek stems corresponding to the Latin terms:<br />
1) ventriculus a) anthrop-<br />
2) humerus b) lapar-<br />
3) glandula c) cardi-<br />
4) cor d) erythr-<br />
5) cartilago e) aden-<br />
6) abdomen f) pharmac-<br />
7) ruber g) col-<br />
8) medicamentum h) brachi-<br />
9) crassum i) gastr-<br />
10) homo j) chondr-<br />
Task 17 (5 marks). Choose the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms-elements:<br />
1) -tomia a) science, knowledge<br />
2) -ectomia b) s<strong>of</strong>tening<br />
11
3) -stomia c) reactivity <strong>of</strong> an<br />
organism<br />
4) -plegia d) displacement<br />
5) -penia e) artificial opening<br />
6) -algia f) paralysis<br />
7) -logia g) cutting<br />
8) -malacia h) pain<br />
9) -ergia i) extraction<br />
10) -ectopia j) lack<br />
Task 18 (5 marks). Find the terms which mean the inflammation:<br />
1) cystoplegia; 2) myelopathia; 3) poliomyelitis; 4) hidrosis; 5) glossitis; 6)<br />
rhinitis; 7) leucosis; 8) emcephalitis; 9) nephrolithiasis; 10) pyonephritis.<br />
Task 19 (10 marks). Form the terms with the given meaning:<br />
1. treatment with water:<br />
2. numerous inflammation <strong>of</strong> joints:<br />
3. muscle tumor:<br />
4. fungoid disease <strong>of</strong> the skin:<br />
5. prolapse <strong>of</strong> the liver:<br />
6. headache:<br />
7. break <strong>of</strong> vessels:<br />
8. eye bleeding:<br />
9. brain s<strong>of</strong>tening:<br />
10. white blood cell:<br />
Task 20 (5 marks). Find the clinical terms written without spelling mistakes:<br />
1) blepharorrhaphia; 2) artroplastica; 3) haepatitis; 4) metrorrhexis; 5) hydremia; 6)<br />
xantodermia; 7) pyelotomia; 8) cardiomyopathia; 9) stomatorhagia; 10)<br />
splanchnoptosis.<br />
12
Literature<br />
Basic.<br />
Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />
medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />
with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />
<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />
13